US5475851A - Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US5475851A
US5475851A US08/125,364 US12536493A US5475851A US 5475851 A US5475851 A US 5475851A US 12536493 A US12536493 A US 12536493A US 5475851 A US5475851 A US 5475851A
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
node
icon
control
variable
global
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime
Application number
US08/125,364
Inventor
Jeffrey L. Kodosky
Steven W. Rogers
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
National Instruments Corp
Original Assignee
National Instruments Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US06/851,569 external-priority patent/US4901221A/en
Priority claimed from US07/979,416 external-priority patent/US5291587A/en
Application filed by National Instruments Corp filed Critical National Instruments Corp
Priority to US08/125,364 priority Critical patent/US5475851A/en
Assigned to NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS, INC. reassignment NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KODOSKY, JEFFREY L., ROGERS, STEVEN W.
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US5475851A publication Critical patent/US5475851A/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F11/00Error detection; Error correction; Monitoring
    • G06F11/36Preventing errors by testing or debugging software
    • G06F11/362Software debugging
    • G06F11/3632Software debugging of specific synchronisation aspects
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F11/00Error detection; Error correction; Monitoring
    • G06F11/36Preventing errors by testing or debugging software
    • G06F11/3664Environments for testing or debugging software
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/04817Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance using icons
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F30/00Computer-aided design [CAD]
    • G06F30/20Design optimisation, verification or simulation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F8/00Arrangements for software engineering
    • G06F8/30Creation or generation of source code
    • G06F8/34Graphical or visual programming
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/448Execution paradigms, e.g. implementations of programming paradigms
    • G06F9/4494Execution paradigms, e.g. implementations of programming paradigms data driven
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T1/00General purpose image data processing
    • G06T1/20Processor architectures; Processor configuration, e.g. pipelining
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T19/00Manipulating 3D models or images for computer graphics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01RMEASURING ELECTRIC VARIABLES; MEASURING MAGNETIC VARIABLES
    • G01R31/00Arrangements for testing electric properties; Arrangements for locating electric faults; Arrangements for electrical testing characterised by what is being tested not provided for elsewhere
    • G01R31/28Testing of electronic circuits, e.g. by signal tracer
    • G01R31/317Testing of digital circuits
    • G01R31/3181Functional testing
    • G01R31/319Tester hardware, i.e. output processing circuits
    • G01R31/31903Tester hardware, i.e. output processing circuits tester configuration
    • G01R31/31912Tester/user interface
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T2200/00Indexing scheme for image data processing or generation, in general
    • G06T2200/24Indexing scheme for image data processing or generation, in general involving graphical user interfaces [GUIs]
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10STECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10S715/00Data processing: presentation processing of document, operator interface processing, and screen saver display processing
    • Y10S715/961Operator interface with visual structure or function dictated by intended use
    • Y10S715/965Operator interface with visual structure or function dictated by intended use for process control and configuration
    • Y10S715/966Computer process, e.g. operation of computer
    • Y10S715/967Visual or iconic programming

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to graphical systems for creating and executing data flow programs, and more specifically to method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow programming environment
  • a computer system can be envisioned as having a number of levels of complexity.
  • the digital logic level comprises the computer's true hardware, primarily consisting of gates which are integrated together to form various integrated circuits. Other hardware devices include printed circuit boards, the power supply, memory, and the various input/output devices, among others.
  • Gates are digital elements having one or more digital inputs, signals representing 0 or 1 states, and which compute an output based on these inputs according to a simple function. Common examples of gates are AND gates, OR gates, etc. It is also noted that there is yet another level below level 0 which can be referred to as the device level. This level deals with the individual transistors and semiconductor physics necessary to construct the gates comprising the digital logic level.
  • the next level is referred to as the microprogramming level.
  • the microprogramming level is essentially a hybrid between computer hardware and software.
  • the microprogramming level is typically implemented by software instructions stored in ROM (read only memory), these instructions being referred to as microcode.
  • the microprogramming level can be thought of as including various interpreters comprised of sequences of microcode which carry out instructions available at the machine language level, which is at level 2. For example, when an instruction such as an arithmetic or shift function appears at the machine language level, this instruction is carried out one step at a time by an interpreter at the microprogramming level. Because the architecture of the microprogramming level is defined by hardware, it is a very difficult level in which to program. Timing considerations are frequently very important in programming at this level and thus usually only very skilled, experienced microprogrammers operate at this level.
  • the level above the microprogramming level is referred to as the machine language level.
  • the machine language level comprises the 1's and 0's that a program uses to execute instructions and manipulate data.
  • the next level above the machine language level is referred to as the assembly language level.
  • This level includes the instruction set of the computer system, i.e. the various op codes, instruction formats, etc. that cause the computer to execute instructions.
  • each instruction produces exactly one machine language instruction.
  • assembly language uses very symbolic human-readable names and addresses instead of binary ones to allow easier programming. For example, where a machine language instruction might include the sequence "101101,” the assembly language equivalent might be "ADD.” Therefore, assembly language is typically the lowest level language used by programmers, and assembly language programming requires a skilled and experienced programmer.
  • the next level includes high level text-based programming languages which are typically used by programmers in writing applications programs. Many different high level programming languages exist, including BASIC, C, FORTRAN, Pascal, COBOL, ADA, APL, etc. Programs written in these high level languages are translated to the machine language level by translators known as compilers. The high level programming languages in this level, as well as the assembly language level, are referred to in this disclosure as text-based programming environments.
  • the task of programming a computer system to model a process often is further complicated by the fact that a sequence of mathematical formulas, mathematical steps or other procedures customarily used to conceptually model a process often does not closely correspond to the traditional text-based programming techniques used to program a computer system to model such a process.
  • a computer programmer typically develops a conceptual model for a physical system which can be partitioned into functional blocks, each of which corresponds to actual systems or subsystems.
  • Computer systems ordinarily do not actually compute in accordance with such conceptualized functional blocks. Instead, they often utilize calls to various subroutines and the retrieval of data from different memory storage locations to implement a procedure which could be conceptualized by a user in terms of a functional block.
  • An instrument is a device which collects information from an environment and displays this information to a user.
  • Examples of various types of instruments include oscilloscopes, digital multimeters, pressure sensors, etc.
  • Types of information which might be collected by respective instruments include: voltage, resistance, distance, velocity, pressure, frequency of oscillation, humidity or temperature, among others.
  • An instrumentation system ordinarily controls its constituent instruments from which it acquires data which it analyzes, stores and presents to a user of the system. Computer control of instrumentation has become increasingly desirable in view of the increasing complexity and variety of instruments available for use.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221 to Kodosky et al discloses a graphical system and method for modeling a process, i.e. a graphical programming environment which enables a user to easily and intuitively model a process.
  • the graphical programming environment disclosed in Kodosky et al can be considered the highest and most intuitive way in which to interact with a computer.
  • FIG. 1A a graphically based programming environment can be represented at level 5 above text-based high level programming languages such as C, Pascal, etc.
  • the method disclosed in Kodosky et al allows a user to construct a diagram using a block diagram editor such that the diagram created graphically displays a procedure or method for accomplishing a certain result, such as manipulating one or more input variables to produce one or more output variables.
  • a user constructs the data flow diagram using the block diagram editor, machine language instructions are automatically constructed which characterize an execution procedure which corresponds to the displayed procedure. Therefore, a user can create a text-based computer program solely by using a graphically based programming environment. This graphically based programming environment may be used for creating virtual instrumentation systems and modeling processes as well as for any type of general programming.
  • controls and indicators which could be created by a user in Kodosky et al. could be either read from or written to by a user, but not both.
  • Input terminals associated with controls were read only and output terminals associated with indicators were write only.
  • a control was either read only or write only, but not both.
  • One advantage of using read only input terminals and write only output terminals was that race conditions could not occur, i.e. race conditions cannot occur in a data flow program between a read only control and a write only indicator.
  • providing only read only or only write only controls greatly limits the flexibility of the program. It would be highly desirable to allow a user to read from or write to any control or indicator at any point in a diagram at any time.
  • a method and apparatus which provides a local variable capability for controls and indicators to allow a user to read and write the memory associated with controls and indicators in multiple places in a block diagram.
  • an iterative loop function and an indefinite loop function were included to allow a user to perform iterations on data.
  • These loop functions included shift registers which provided these loops with the capability of storing data from one iteration to the next in order for them to operate on previous data or to enable them to remember what had occurred in a previous iteration.
  • Shift registers for storage of values could be initialized upon entering a loop, i.e., assigned values upon entering the loop, and then could be updated subsequently during execution of the loop. The loop could change these variables a multitude of times depending on the desired result.
  • the shift registers could be left uninitialized, i.e., not assigned values when the loop was entered.
  • shift registers in loops can be best illustrated by the Fibonacci number problem which is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221.
  • the values in the shift registers on entering the loop are the same as the values written to the shift registers the previous time the loop was executed.
  • a shift register that is not initialized on entry in a loop could essentially be used as a global variable because it "remembers" what happened on previous updates.
  • the present invention comprises local and global variable capabilities which enable a user to more effectively create block diagram programs and model processes in a graphical data flow programming environment.
  • the local and global variables include associated panel controls which allow a user to read or adjust the values of these variables during program execution.
  • a global variable is created by placing a global variable icon in a block diagram and creating an associated global variable panel.
  • the global variable panel is not associated with a VI. Therefore, a global variable is not created in a functional VI, but rather is created with its own panel not associated with a VI whose only purpose is to facilitate the implementation of a global variable.
  • the user then defines the data type of the global variable and assigns a name to the global variable. Therefore, global variables are not required to be implemented as shift registers in a loop contained within a sub-V This greatly reduces the storage and execution overhead associated with creating and using global variables. Since a global variable is associated with a panel, the user can view the global variable updating on the panel during execution of a VI. This greatly facilitates debugging. The user can also change the value of the global variable during execution.
  • a local variable is created in a similar manner to a global variable.
  • a local variable is created in a functional VI.
  • the data storage of a local variable is provided by one of the controls on a VI's front panel.
  • Writing to a local variable has the same result as passing data to the control terminal, except that the user can write to it even though it is a control.
  • the user can have any number of local variable references to a given front panel control with some in write mode and others in read mode.
  • One distinction between local and global variables is that a local variable is peculiar to the panel corresponding to the VI where the local is created, whereas a global variable is global to all VIs.
  • a local variable reference allows the user to use a front panel control as both an input and an output.
  • One benefit of this local variable capability is that local variables can be used in their respective VIs and are guaranteed not to be affected by other VIs or other block diagrams. This provides a cleaner programming environment and ensures that a user's local variable will not be affected by undesirable changes in other VIs.
  • a second benefit of the local variable capability of the present invention is that a user can have multiple functions operating concurrently wherein each function can potentially affect the input or output to a control or indicator.
  • the present invention allows a user to implement a read/write control to more effectively interact with the front panel.
  • FIG. 1 illustrates various levels of complexity in a computer system according to the prior art
  • FIG. 1A illustrates the various levels of complexity of a computer system including a graphical programming environment as the highest level
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a system for modeling a process according to the present invention
  • FIG. 3 Is an illustrative drawing of a representation of a virtual instrument produced using the system of FIG. 2;
  • FIG. 4 shows a block diagram of an instrumentation system including the system of FIG. 2;
  • FIG. 5 is a representative drawing of various choices for an illustrative hardware instrumentation system of the preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 5A is an illustrative hardware instrumentation system of the preferred embodiment
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the computer system of FIGS. 5 and 5A;
  • FIG. 7 shows a block diagram representing an exemplary data flow system
  • FIG. 8A illustrates a virtual instrument data structure diagram used by the system of FIG. 2 and the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 8B shows a legend applicable to the illustration of FIG. 8A
  • FIGS. 9A-L are flowchart diagrams illustrating operation of the execution subsystem of FIGS. 2 and 4;
  • FIG. 10 shows an illustrative front panel produced using the front panel editor of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 11 shows an illustrative icon produced using the icon editor of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 12A shows a graphical representation of a sequence structure
  • FIG. 12B shows a graphical representation of an iterative loop structure
  • FIG. 12C shows a graphical representation of a conditional structure
  • FIG. 12D shows a graphical representation of an indefinite loop structure
  • FIG. 12E shows a graphical representation of shift registers on the indefinite loop structure of FIG. 12D
  • FIG. 13 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of a sequence structure shown in FIG. 12A;
  • FIG. 14 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical represention of an iterative loop structure shown in FIG. 12B;
  • FIG. 15 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of a conditional structure shown in FIG. 12C;
  • FIG. 16 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical represention of an indefinite loop structure shown in FIG. 12D;
  • FIG. 17 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of an iterative loop structure including a shift register shown on the left in FIG. 12E;
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a type descriptor used to describe data structures
  • FIGS. 19A-K illustrate computer video displays during each successive step in a construction of an exemplary block diagram using the block diagram editor of FIGS. 2 or 4;
  • FIGS. 20A-C illustrate a system representation corresponding to FIGS. 19A-D;
  • FIGS. 21A-B illustrate a system representation corresponding to FIGS. 19E and 19H;
  • FIG. 22 is a drawing representing a block diagram according to the present invention as displayed on a computer video monitor to model the illustrative hardware system of FIG. 5A;
  • FIG. 23 illustrates serial execution mode of a VI
  • FIG. 24 illustrates "wait” icon execution
  • FIG. 25 illustrates parallel execution mode for a VI
  • FIG. 26 illustrates a ready node list, also referred to as the run queue
  • FIG. 27 illustrates how nodes are placed on the run queue as they become ready and are interleaved with other nodes
  • FIG. 28 illustrates parallel execution of nodes in a block diagram virtual instrument
  • FIGS. 29-37 illustrate various virtual instrument execution states
  • FIG. 38 illustrates an execution road map
  • FIG. 39 illustrates execution state symbols
  • FIGS. 40-41 illustrates virtual instruments in various execution states
  • FIG. 42 illustrates an example of the front panel for a temperature VI
  • FIG. 43 illustrates the block diagram for the temperature VI in FIG. 42
  • FIG. 44 illustrates the icon and connector for the temperature VI in FIGS. 42 and 43;
  • FIGS. 45 and 46 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses the temperature VI in FIGS. 42-44 as a subVI in its block diagram;
  • FIG. 47 illustrates a front panel and its associated block diagram
  • FIG. 48 illustrates the run mode palette that appears at the top of the window when a VI is in run mode
  • FIGS. 49A-D illustrate the run button and its associated icons
  • FIGS. 50A-B illustrate the mode button in run mode and edit mode
  • FIGS. 51A-B illustrate the icons associated with the continuous run button
  • FIGS. 52A-B iilustrate breakpoint button icons
  • FIGS. 53A-C illustrate icons associated with the step mode button
  • FIGS. 54A-B illustrate execution highlighting button icons
  • FIGS. 55A-B illustrate print mode button icons
  • FIGS. 56A-C illustrate data logging button icons
  • FIG. 57 illustrates the edit mode palette
  • FIGS. 58A-B illustrate operating tool icons
  • FIGS. 59A-C illustrate positioning tool icons
  • FIGS. 60A-C illustrate labeling tool icons
  • FIG. 61 illustrates the wiring tool
  • FIGS. 62A-B illustrate the coloring tool
  • FIG. 63 illustrates the menu bar in its active state
  • FIG. 64 illustrates the file menu
  • FIG. 65 illustrates the edit menu
  • FIG. 66 illustrates the operate menu
  • FIG. 67 illustrates the controls menu
  • FIG. 68 illustrates the windows menu
  • FIG. 69 illustrates the text menu
  • FIG. 70 illustrates the menu bar when the diagram window is active
  • FIG. 71 illustrates the functions menu
  • FIG. 72 illustrates examples of numeric controls and indicators
  • FIG. 73 illustrates examples of Boolean controls and indicators
  • FIG. 74 illustrates how controls and indicators are configured
  • FIG. 75 illustrates the panel window and diagram window of a VI illustrating nodes, terminals, and wires
  • FIG. 76 illustrates examples of wire types
  • FIGS. 77 and 78 are examples of VIs
  • FIG. 79 illustrates icons grouped together into a lower level VI
  • FIG. 80 illustrates a VI that adds three numbers together and returns their result
  • FIG. 81 illustrates activating the icon editor
  • FIG. 82 illustrates the tools that may be used to-create an icon design
  • FIG. 83 illustrates the show connector function in the icon pane pop-up menu which may be used to define a connector
  • FIG. 84 illustrates a front panel with the connector replacing the icon pane in the upper right corner of the panel window
  • FIG. 85 illustrates the various choices for terminal patterns selected using the patterns option from the pop-up menu
  • FIG. 86-88 illustrates how a user assigns front panel controls and indicators to the terminals using the wiring tool
  • FIG. 89 illustrates the VI option which is used to place a VI as a subVI in the block diagram of another VI
  • FIG. 90 illustrates the help window for a subVI icon
  • FIG. 91 illustrates a While Loop selected from the Structs and Constants palette of the Functions Menu
  • FIG. 92 illustrates a while loop
  • FIG. 93 illustrates an example of a while loop
  • FIG. 94 illustrates a for loop
  • FIG. 95 illustrates an example of a for loop
  • FIG. 96 illustrates the grey dot created during numeric conversions
  • FIG. 97 illustrates a shift register
  • FIG. 98 illustrates the operation of a shift register
  • FIG. 99 illustrates a shift register with additional terminals to access values from previous iterations
  • FIG. 100 illustrates operation of initialized and uninitialized shift registers
  • FIG. 101 illustrates selection of a case structure from the Structs and Constats palette of the Function Menu.
  • FIG. 102 illustrates a numerical case structure
  • FIG. 103 illustrates a Boolean case structure
  • FIG. 104 is an example of a Boolean case structure
  • FIG. 105 illustrates a sequence structure selected from the Structs and Constants menu palette of the Functions Menu
  • FIG. 106 illustrates a sequence structure
  • FIG. 107 illustrates an example of a three framed sequence structure using sequence locals
  • FIG. 108 illustrates a formula node selected from the structs and constants palette of the functions menu
  • FIG. 109 illustrates an equation implemented using arithmetic functions
  • FIG. 110 illustrates the same equation implemented using a formula node
  • FIG. 111 itlhstrates a waveform chart
  • FIG. 112 illustrates the three update modes of a waveform chart, referred to as strip chart, scope chart, and sweep chart;
  • FIG. 113 illustrates how a scalar output is directly wired to a waveform chart
  • FIG. 114 illustrates how a waveform chart accommodates more than one plot using the bundle function
  • FIG. 115 illustrates selection of the local variable option from the Structs and Constants menu
  • FIG. 116 illustrates the Structs and Constants menu
  • FIG. 117 illustrates a local variable node
  • FIG. 118 illustrates selection of an appropriate local variable by either choosing the variable from the Select Item menu or clicking on it using the operating tool;
  • FIG. 119 illustrates the change to read local option
  • FIG. 120 illustrates local variables as well as the Select Item menu for these variables
  • FIG. 121 illustrates multiple local variables accessing the same control
  • FIG. 122 is a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the block diagram editor when a local variable is created
  • FIG. 123 illustrates the possible storage options for local variables of various data types
  • FIG. 124 illustrates a front panel where one switch is used to control two charts having corresponding while loops
  • FIGS. 125-126 are incorrect methods for implementing the front panel of FIG.
  • FIG. 127 is a method for implementing the front panel of FIG. 124 using local variables according to the preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 128 illustrates a VI which uses local variables to update a string to display the loop currently executing
  • FIG. 129 illustrates a VI that uses a local variable to update a string indicator and graph in multiple places on the diagram
  • FIGS. 130-132 illustrate the frames of a sequence structure comprising a block diagram corresponding to the front panel of FIG. 129;
  • FIGS. 133-136 illustrate front panel and block diagram of a VI which uses a local variable to both read and write to a front panel control
  • FIGS. 137 and 138 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that generates two diffe, r, ent random numbers and displays them on two waveform charts;
  • FIGS. 139 and 140 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that continuously generates random numbers and displays them inside digital indicators until a stop button is pressed;
  • FIG. 141 illustrates a modified block diagram of the VI illustrated in FIGS. 139-140, where the slide is immediately latched back to standby after each number is generated;
  • FIG. 142 illustrates selection of a global variable from the Structs and Constants menu
  • FIG. 143 illustrates the Structs and Constants menu
  • FIG. 144 illustrates a global variable node
  • FIG. 145 illustrates a panel having three globals
  • FIG. 146 illustrates selection of a specific global variable desired to be accessed
  • FIG. 147 illustrates using the operating tool to click on a global variable node and choosing the desired global variable
  • FIG. 148 illustrates a change to write global selection
  • FIG. 149 is a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the block diagram editor when a global variable is created
  • FIG. 150 illustrates two VIs running simultaneously which include a global variable used to terminate both VIs
  • FIGS. 151 and 154 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a global variable VI
  • FIGS. 152A-B illustrate elements used in the block diagram of FIG. 154;
  • FIG. 153 illustrates selection of a stop button used to pass values between two concurrently running VIs
  • FIGS. 155-156 are a front panel and block diagram of a VI that reads from a global variable
  • FIGS. 157-158 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses both global and local variables.
  • the system 28 includes a respective block diagram editor 30, an execution subsystem 32, an icon editor 34, and a front panel editor 36 all interconnected.
  • the system 28 also includes a control processor 38 which connects to each of the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30 and execution subsystem 32.
  • the system 28 can be used for a number of purposes. In the preferred embodiment, the system 28 is shown primarily in creating "virtual instruments" (VIs), which are instruments created in software. However, the system 28 of the present invention has many other applications, including modeling a process or any other type of general programming.
  • VIPs virtual instruments
  • the block diagram editor 30 is used to construct and display a graphical diagram, referred to as a block diagram, which visually displays a procedure by which a value for a input variable produces a value for one or more output variables.
  • This procedure together with the input and output variables, comprises a process model.
  • the block diagram editor 30 constructs execution instructions which characterize an execution procedure which corresponds to the displayed procedure.
  • the block diagram editor 30 constructs instructions in the machine language which execute the block diagram created by the user.
  • the execution subsystem 32 assigns at least one value to the input variable and executes the execution instructions to produce a value for the output variable.
  • the block diagram editor 30 and the execution subsystem 32 are constructed in software.
  • the control processor 38 implements the block diagram editor 30 and the execution subsystem 32 of the preferred embodiment.
  • the system 28 permits a user to construct a virtual instrument (also referred to as a VI) 40 such as that represented in generalized form in the illustrative drawings of FIG. 3.
  • the virtual instrument 40 includes a front panel 42 which permits interactive use of the virtual instrument 40 by a user.
  • the front panel 42 permits graphical representation of input and output variables provided to the virtual instrument 40.
  • the respective graphical representations on the front panel 42 for input and output variables are referred to as controls and indicators, respectively; although in some instances controls and indicators are referred to collectively as controls.
  • the virtual instrument 40 also includes an icon 44 which permits use of the virtual instrument 40 as a subunit in other virtual instruments (not shown).
  • the virtual instrument 40 also includes a block diagram 46 which graphically provides a visual representation of a procedure or method by which a specified value for an input variable displayed in the front panel 42 can produce a corresponding value for an output variable in the front panel 42.
  • the user uses the block diagram editor 30 to create a graphical program, and the resultant graphical icons appear in the block diagram 46.
  • the virtual instrument 40 itself is a hierarchical construction which may comprise within its block diagram 46 respective icons 48 and 50 referencing other virtual instruments (sub-VIs) indicated generally by respective blocks 52 and 54.
  • the block diagram 46 may also include one or more "primitives" corresponding to simple functions that may be performed. Together sub-VIs, primitives and other types of data processing elements comprised within the block diagram 46 are referred to as function icons. Function icons in the block diagram 46 have associated control means or software which implement the desired functions.
  • FIG. 4 shows an instrumentation system 56 incorporating the system 28 shown in FIG. 2. Elements of the instrumentation system 56 which are substantially identical to those of second system 28 are designated with the same reference numerals as those of the system 28 for convenience.
  • the instrumentation system 56 includes a keyboard and display 58 and an instrument 60.
  • the control processor 38 and the keyboard and display 58 may be implemented using any type of general purpose computer.
  • the instrumentation system 56 is preferably used to control the instrument 60, i.e., acquire data from the instrument 60, analyze that data, store that data, and present that data to the user in a meaningful way.
  • the block diagram editor 30 can also be used to create virtual instruments as desired.
  • FIG. 5 illustrates various design choices available in an instrumentation system 204 in the preferred embodiment.
  • a computer system 206 programmed according to the present invention can interface with a unit under test 212, i.e., can perform data acquisition and control of the unit under test 212, using a number of methods. These methods include using GPIB instruments 12, plug-in data acquisition boards 19 with associated signal conditioning logic 11, or VXI instruments 14. In addition a serial RS-232 method (not shown) can be used, as desired.
  • the computer 206 may be any type of computer including any type of Apple computer, IBM PC-compatible computer, PS/2, Sun workstation, etc.
  • FIG. 5A shows an illustrative hardware configuration of an instrumentation system 204 according to the present invention.
  • the system 204 includes a computer 206 which includes the control processor 38 as well as the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30, and execution subsystem 32. As previously mentioned the elements 30-36 are preferably implemented in software.
  • the computer 206 illustrated in FIG. 5 includes an interface to a GPIB (general purpose instrument bus) 207 which in turn is connected to a Tektronix 5010 Function generator 208 and a Fluke 8840A digital multimeter 210.
  • a unit under test 212 is coupled between the function generator 208 and multimeter 210 as shown.
  • FIG. 22 a computer generated display of a completed block diagram for the instrumentation system 204 in FIG. 5A is shown.
  • the block diagram in FIG. 22 is created by a user using the block diagram editor 30 of FIG. 2.
  • the block diagram is essentially the graphical program representing the instrumentation system's operation and shows the interconnections between the elements of the instrument, the signal paths, and the relationship to other virtual instruments.
  • a user uses the block diagram editor 30 to create the block diagram 46 in FIG. 22 to control the operation of the instrumentation system 204.
  • the user uses the front panel editor 36 to create a front panel 42 to control the function or waveform generator 208 and multimeter 210.
  • the user can then execute the block diagram (FIG. 22) using the execution subsystem 32.
  • the block diagram 46 can, for example, control the output of the waveform generator 208 to the unit under test 212 and can also be used to receive, analyze and present the output from the unit under test 212 which is provided from the multimeter 210.
  • an instrumentation system 204 may include one or more modular instruments on plug-in boards in conjunction with the VXI bus specification. The plug-in board instruments would then assume the function of the function generator 208 and multimeter 210.
  • the computer 206 can include a data acquisition card including A-D (analog to digital) and D-A (digital to analog) convertors, wherein the D-A convertor generates waveform signals to the unit under test 212 and the output from the unit under test 212 is then provided through an A-D convertor to the computer system 206.
  • A-D analog to digital
  • D-A digital to analog
  • the computer system 206 includes a central processing unit or CPU 21 which is coupled to a processor or host bus 24.
  • the CPU 21 acts as the control processor 38.
  • the CPU may be any of various types, including an Intel x86 processor such as the i486, a CPU from the Motorola family of processors, as well as others.
  • Main memory 22 is coupled to the host bus 24 by means of memory controller 23.
  • the main memory 22 stores the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30 and execution subsystem 32.
  • Host bus 24 is coupled to an expansion or input/output bus 26 by means of a bus controller 25.
  • the expansion bus 26 includes slots for various devices, including video 16 and hard drive 17.
  • a data acquisition card 19 is connected to the expansion bus 26.
  • the data acquisition card 19 receives analog signals from an external sensor or instrument and in turn produces digital data that is provided to the CPU 21 and used by the system and method of the present invention.
  • the computer system 206 also includes a GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) card 18 that interfaces to one or more instruments via the GPIB bus 15.
  • the computer system 206 also includes an MXI card 10 that connects to VXI chassis 14.
  • the block diagram 186 includes three respective input registers 188, 190 and 192 which provide an accumulation of input data. As soon as all input data are present, output of AND gate 194 becomes TRUE, and computation and/or control element 196 will begin computation. The computation element 196 begins generating output data which are stored in respective output registers 198, 200 and 202. When all output data are available, an output token is generated by the computation element 196 indicating that output data are available for transmission to a next system (not shown). It will be appreciated that the computation element 196 can be a combination of more than one subsystem (not shown).
  • FIG. 8A illustrates a virtual instrument data structure diagram.
  • the system 28 of FIG. 2 and the instrumentation system 56 of FIG. 4 each utilize the principles set forth in the data structure diagram of FIG. 8A. It will be appreciated that implementation of a system utilizing a data structure such as that diagrammed in the diagram of FIG. 8A advantageously permits the implementation of an extended data flow system like that illustrated in FIG. 7.
  • execution instructions are constructed by constructing a visual display or block diagram in which at least one input variable produces at least output variable according to a displayed procedure. Furthermore, the execution instructions are constructed such that, when a value is assigned to a particular input variable, a value for a corresponding output variable is produced according to the procedure illustrated in the visual display. Additionally, the execution instructions are constructed in response to the construction of a block diagram comprising the graphical display. Thus, a user need only construct an appropriate visual display or block diagram in order to construct the execution instructions.
  • implementation of data flow principles by using a data structure such as that shown in the diagram of FIG. 8A advantageously permits the use of parallel processing which increases the speed with which the execution of execution instructions can be accomplished.
  • FIG. 8A shows a system representation of a virtual instrument.
  • Boxes 8a-8k indicate conceptual objects in the system that have well-defined properties.
  • Objects 8i, 8j, and 8k are grouped into shaded box 8s and share some properties and form a class of objects.
  • a solid line with an arrow is used to indicate a potential one-to-many relationship, i.e., the source object contains zero or more destination objects (e.g., a vehicle containing zero or more wheels).
  • a dashed line with an arrow is used to indicate a potential one-to-one relationship, i.e., the source object may reference zero or one destination object (e.g., a library book may or may not have a borrower).
  • Line 8n indicates that a virtual instrument 8b contains a front panel with a multiplicity ot controls 8c.
  • a control may be of clustered type in which case it contains a multiplicity of subcontrols as indicated by line 8p.
  • Line 8q indicates that a virtual instrument contains an icon with a multiplicity of terminals 8d.
  • Line 8l indicates that virtual instruments also contains a multiplicity of block diagrams 8e.
  • a virtual instrument either contains one diagram or none.
  • Built in virtual instruments representing primitive computations (primitives) have no diagrams.
  • Line 8r indicates that a block diagram contains a multiplicity of objects or the node class.
  • a block diagram contains exactly one self reference node 8i, and an arbitrary number of structure nodes 8j or instrument use nodes 8k.
  • Line 8t indicates that a structure node contains a multiplicity of subdiagrams.
  • a sequence structure or a conditional structure contains one or more subdiagrams, and an iterative loop structure or indefinite loop structure contains exactly one subdiagram.
  • Line 8m indicates that an instrument use node (I-use node) is used to reference another virtual instrument.
  • the instrument use node may reference a virtual instrument in real-time; or it may rererence previous data acquired by the virtual instrument.
  • Line 8u indicates that each object ot the node class contains a multiplicity of terminals 8g.
  • Line 8v indicates that a block diagram also contains a multiplicity or signal paths 8f. Each signal path contains a multiplicity of terminals as indicated by line 8w. There is at most one terminal per signal path that is designated as the source or the signal.
  • Each terminal contained in a signal path also is contained in a node. However, there may be terminals in nodes which are not in signal paths. The terminals in a signal path are typically in dirrerent nodes. Lines 8y and 8z indicate that each terminal may reference a front panel control or a block diagram control (e.g., a constant). A terminal references exactly one control, and it is either on the front panel or on the block diagram.
  • FIGS. 9A-L a flowchart diagram illustrating the operation of the execution subsystem is shown.
  • the main execution loop of the block diagram execution subsystem is shown.
  • the execution subsystem 32 initializes the run queue.
  • the run queue is the main queue in which all nodes are scheduled to be operated on by the execution subsystem 32.
  • the initial node is scheduled on the run queue by the execution subsystem 32, with all subsequent nodes in the block diagram being scheduled by preceding nodes in the data flow diagram.
  • the execution subsystem 32 relinquishes control to allow other graphical environment functions to be performed.
  • other functions include the front panel editor 36 which allows a user to create a front panel, the icon editor 34 which allows a user to create and edit icons, the block diagram editor 30 which allows a user to use the graphical programming environment to create programs, etc.
  • These other functions at some point will invoke the execution subsystem 32. For example, when the user builds a block diagram and then clicks on the run arrow to execute the diagram, the execution subsystem 32 is invoked. When the execution subsystem 32 is invoked, the subsystem 32 checks the run queue to determine if anything has been placed on the queue. If nothing is placed on the run queue in step 306, then the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 304 and allows other systems to perform their functions until something is placed on the queue.
  • step 306 the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 308 and de-queues the node having the highest priority.
  • step 310 the execution subsystem 32 executes the node.
  • the node execution step includes executing all or a portion of a node and is discussed in much greater detail below.
  • the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 312 and determines whether the node has indicated a desire to be re-queued on the run queue. In general, if only a portion of the node was executed in step 310, the node will indicate in its return that it wishes to be replaced on the run queue to have its remaining portion executed.
  • step 312 If the node has expressed a desire to be re-queued on the run queue in step 312, i.e. if the node has not been fully completed in step 310, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 314, re-enqueues the node on the run queue, and then returns back to step 304. If the node has completed in step 310 and thus the node has not indicated a desire to be re-placed on the run queue, the execution subsystem 32 returns from step 312 directly to step 304. In step 304 other parts of the graphical programming environment execute. When control returns to the execution subsystem 32, the execution subsystem 32 performs steps 306-314 as previously described.
  • step 320 the execution subsystem performs node specific functions, i.e., specific functions for the particular type or node being executed.
  • node specific functions i.e., specific functions for the particular type or node being executed.
  • a plurality of different types of nodes can be placed on the run queue, including a self reference node, an instrument use node, a simple node such as a primitive node or code interface node, a loop structure node, a case structure node, a sequence structure node, an asynchronous node, and a long computational node.
  • the specific functions performed by the execution subsystem for respective nodes are discussed further below with regard to FIGS. 9C-9K.
  • step 320 the execution subsystem 32 determines in step 322 if execution of the node has completed. If not, the subsystem 32 returns to step 312 and determines if the node should be re-queued on the run queue. If the node has completed in step 322, the subsystem 32 advances to step 324. In step 324 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the node being executed has any outputs that need to be propagated. If the node has any outputs then a certain number of those output signals will need to be propagated to subsequent nodes in the data flow diagram.
  • the execution subsystem 32 sets the desire to be requeued for that respective node to false in step 325 and returns to step 312. Since the node was determined to have completed step 322 and has propagated all of its signals in step 324, the node has completed all operations, and thus its desire to be requeued is set to false.
  • the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 326 and copies the data that was computed in step 320 to destination nodes, i.e., nodes which receive the outputs of the respective node being executed as inputs.
  • the destination nodes are the respective nodes which the outputs of the node being executed are connected to.
  • the execution subsystem 32 decrements the destination node's short count, which is described below.
  • Each node includes two count numbers referred to as a fire count and a short count.
  • Each node's fire count refers to the number of inputs received by that node.
  • the node's short count Prior to execution of the block diagram, the node's short count is set to the respective node's fire count. For example, if a node has three inputs, the node's fire count would be three, and prior to execution the node's short count would also be set to three.
  • the short count is decremented until all inputs to that node have been received. When the node's short count has reached zero, then all inputs to that node have been received.
  • step 326 when data is copied to a destination node, one of the inputs to that destination node has received its required data and thus the destination node's short count is decremented.
  • step 330 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the destination node's short count has reached zero. If that node's destination short count has reached zero, then that destination node is enqueued on the run queue in step 332. The execution subsystem 32 then returns to step 324 to determine if any more output signals need to be propagated. If the respective destination node's short count has not reached zero in step 330, then that destination node is not enqueued on the run queue, but rather the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 324. The subsystem 32 continues to execute steps 324-332 as long as any output signals need to be propagated from the respective node.
  • the node-specific function executed in step 320 of FIG. 9B depend on the type of node being executed. As previously discussed, there are a plurality of different nodes that can be executed, including a self-reference node, loop structure node, case structure node, etc. Each type of node includes a plurality of different starting points where execution can begin in step 320, these starting points being referred to as 0 for the initial starting point or initial execution of the node and 1 for a later starting point of execution in the node. The exception to this is the long computational node which includes three starting points referred to as 0, 1, and 2.
  • FIGS. 9C and 9D illustrate the steps performed if the node executed in step 320 is a self-reference node.
  • the execution subsystem 32 determines if this is the initial call to the 0 starting point of the self-reference node at the beginning of the respective diagram, or a call to the self-reference node at starting point 1 signifying the end of a diagram.
  • Each VI, sub-VI, and loop diagram includes a self-reference node that is referenced when the diagram is entered to initialize the node and propagate signals to the node and also when the diagram is exited to place the node that called the self-reference node back on the run queue.
  • step 344 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the self-reference node being executed is a top level self-reference node, i.e., a self-reference node corresponding to a main block diagram. If not, the subsystem 32 advances to step 350. If so, the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 346 and determines if the self-reference node being executed was called as a sub-VI. If the self-reference node was determined to have been called as a sub-VI in step 346, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 348 and copies in the parameters from the instrument (I-use) node that called the self-reference node, referred to as the caller I-use node, which is at the head of the wait queue. The wait queue is described further below. The execution subsystem 32 then advances to step 350. If the self-reference node was not called as a sub-VI, the subsystem 32 advances directly to step 350.
  • the instrument (I-use) node that called the self-reference no
  • step 350 for each node comprised within the self-reference node's diagram the execution subsystem 32 sets each node's short count to its fire count.
  • step 351 the execution subsystem 32 sets each node's starting point to its initial starting point, i.e. starting point 0.
  • the subsystem 32 also sets the starting point of itself to its second starting point, starting point 1, in step 352.
  • step 353 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true and returns to step 322. It is noted here that setting node complete to true where the node was entered at starting point 0 is different from all other nodes. With regard to all other nodes, node complete is set to true only at the last entry into the node.
  • node complete is set to true in step 353 at starting point 0 of the node because it is necessary to propagate all signals to the nodes in the diagram associated with the self-reference node at the initial call to the self-reference node. With all other nodes, node complete is set to true after execution of the node, i.e., only after the last starting point of the node has been entered and the node has completed.
  • step 354 the execution subsystem 32 again determines if the self-reference node corresponds to the diagram of a top level block diagram. If not, then the self-reference node corresponds to the diagram of a structure node such as a loop structure node, a case structure node, or a sequence structure node.
  • the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 356 and enqueues the owning structure node of the self-reference node diagram on the run queue.
  • the execution subsystem 32 then advances to step 364 and resets the self-reference node starting point to 0.
  • step 358 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the caller I-use node is at the self-reference node wait queue head.
  • Each self-reference node includes a wait queue where the I-use node corresponding to a call to the subVI is enqueued. This is for the situation where the self-reference node being executed corresponds to that of a sub-VI when it is called from an I-use node.
  • the wait queue is for the situation where a higher level VI (also referred to as a caller VI) includes one or more usages of a sub-Vl, i.e. one or more instrument usage nodes (referred to as caller I-use nodes) for the same sub-VI.
  • a higher level VI also referred to as a caller VI
  • instrument usage nodes referred to as caller I-use nodes
  • caller I-use nodes instrument usage nodes
  • the execution subsystem must ensure that only one usage of a sub-VI executes from start to finish before another usage of the same sub-VI is initiated.
  • each sub-VI includes only one self-reference node in serial mode, only one usage of that sub-VI can execute at any one time, and thus the sub-VI includes a wait queue where calls to that sub-VI are placed to ensure that only one usage of the sub-VI is executing at any one time.
  • step 364 If the caller I-use node is not at the wait queue head in step 358, the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 364. If the caller I-use node is at the wait queue head, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 360 and copies out the parameters to the caller I-use node. The execution subsystem 32 then dequeues the caller I-use node from the self-reference node wait queue in step 361 and enqueues the caller I-use on the run queue in step 362. This completes a single usage of this VI as a subVI.
  • step 364 the execution subsystem 32 resets the self-reference node starting point to starting point 0, i.e., the initial starting point. Thus, when the self-reference node is again called, it will be as if it were an initial self-reference node call in step 342.
  • step 364 node complete is set to false in step 366, and the execution subsystem 32 determines if another instrument usage node is at the wait queue head in step 368. If not, then in step 370 the execution subsystem 32 sets the node wish to be requeued to false and returns to step 312.
  • step 372 the execution subsystem 32 sets the desire to be requeued to a true value and returns to step 312. In this instance, the diagram corresponding to the self-reference node has again been invoked, and thus the self-reference node needs to be requeued.
  • an instrument use or usage node (I-use node) is used to call a sub-VI diagram, or more correctly is used to call the self-reference node of a sub-VI diagram.
  • FIG. 9E a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the instrument use node is shown.
  • the execution subsystem 32 determines if the I-use node is at starting point 0, i.e. this is the initial entry into the I-use node. If not, then in step 396 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true. In this instance, this is the second call to the respective I-use node, i.e. the I-use node starting point is at 1. Thus node complete is set equal to true and the node completes. This will happen when the subVI has finished executing on behalf of this Instrument usage node.
  • step 384 the execution subsystem 32 sets the I-use node starting point to 1. This is done so that the next entry to this I-use node causes the decision in step 382 to be false.
  • step 386 the execution subsystem 32 queues the I-use node on the sub-VI diagram's self-reference node wait queue. This is a queue where the calling nodes wait their turn to run a respective sub-VI's top level diagram, i.e. a respective sub-VI.
  • step 388 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the I-use node is at the head of the sub-VI self-reference node wait queue. If the I-use node is at the head of the self-reference node wait queue in step 388, then in step 390 it enqueues the sub-VI self-reference node on the run queue. The execution subsystem then advances to step 392. If the I-use node is not at the head of the wait queue in step 388, then the execution subsystem 32 advances directly to step 392. (in this situation the subVI is already executing on behalf of another caller I-use node.)
  • step 392 the execution subsystem sets node complete to false. Since this was the 0 starting point of the I-use node and the self-reference node was just placed on the run queue in step 390, node complete is set to false to enable the I-use node to be called again to complete operations at a later time when the subVI finishes executing on it's behalf.
  • step 394 the execution subsystem sets the desire to be requeued to false. In this situation, the sub-VI self-reference node has been placed on the run queue and is required to run before the instrument use node is again called at the end of the sub-VI self-reference node execution.
  • the sub-VI self-reference has the task of placing the I-use node on the run queue, which occurs in step 362 at FIG. 9D.
  • the I-use node execution then completes.
  • a simple node includes primitive nodes and code interface nodes.
  • the execution subsystem 32 performs the function indicated by the node. For example, if the node is a simple add or subtract node or an attribute node, bundle node, etc., the execution subsystem 32 performs the indicated operation. If the node being executed is a code interface node, then in step 398 the execution subsystem 32 invokes a text-based language routine previously created by the user which performs a desired function. In step 399 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true. Thus, when the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 322 in FIG. 9B, the node's output signals will be propagated in steps 324-332.
  • a loop structure node corresponds to an iterative loop structure node or an indefinite loop structure node, which are discussed with reference to FIGS. 12B and 12D.
  • the execution subsystem 32 determines if it has begun execution at the loop node's 0 starting point, i.e. the loop node's initial starting point. If so, then in step 404 the execution subsystem 32 sets the loop node starting point to 1. In step 406 the subsystem 32 prepares a loop counter and in step 408 prepares auto-indexing for the loop.
  • Auto-indexing is a feature of loop structure nodes wherein arrays are indexed or accumulated at the loop boundary automatically.
  • the execution subsystem 32 enqueues the self-reference node (SRN) of the subdiagram on the run queue.
  • the subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 414 sets the node's desire to be requeued to false.
  • the node's desire to be requeued is set to false because the node places itself back on the run queue in step 424, as discussed below.
  • step 416 the subsystem increments the loop counter to index into the loop.
  • the execution subsystem 32 progresses auto-indexing in step 417 and evaluates the reiteration in step 418.
  • step 420 the subsystem 32 determines if the loop will reiterate. If not, then the loop is done, i.e., the loop has finished iterating, and the subsystem sets node complete to true in step 422 and returns to step 322 (FIG. 9B). It finishes the auto-indexing feature in step 421.
  • the node complete question in step 322 will be answered in the affirmative and thus the subsystem will advance to step 324 and propagate signals.
  • step 424 the subsystem 32 enqueues the subdiagram self-reference node on the run queue in step 420 and advances to step 412.
  • steps 412 and 414 node complete is set to false and the desire to be requeued is also set to false.
  • the execution subsystem then returns to step 322 (FIG. 9B).
  • the node complete question in step 322 will be answered in the negative, and thus the subsystem will return back to step 312 (FIG. 9A).
  • a case structure node corresponds to the conditional structure illustrated in FIG. 12C.
  • the node specific functions performed in step 320 are as follows.
  • the execution subsystem 32 determines if the case node has been entered at its 0 starting point, i.e. if this is the initial entry into execution of the case node. If so, then in step 432 the execution subsystem sets the starting point of the case node to 1. Thus, the next time the case node is entered, the question in step 430 will be answered in the negative.
  • the execution subsystem 32 checks the select input to determine which of the N diagrams will run.
  • step 436 the subsystem enqueues the selected subdiagram self-reference node on the run queue.
  • the execution subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 440 sets the desire to be requeued to false. Execution then completes. If the case node starting point is determined to be 1 in step 430, then in step 441 the execution subsystem sets node complete to true and then completes.
  • a sequence structure node corresponds to the sequence structure illustrated in FIG. 12A.
  • the subsystem determines if this is the initial starting point (starting point 0) for the sequence structure node. If so, then in step 444 the subsystem 32 sets the sequence node starting point to 1.
  • the execution subsystem 32 sets a variable referred to as Diagram Number to zero.
  • the variable Diagram Number refers to the particular diagram of the sequence structure, which includes a plurality of diagrams.
  • the subsystem 32 enqueues the Diagram Number's self-reference node on the run queue.
  • the subsystem 32 sets node complete to false and completes.
  • step 452 the subsystem 32 increments the variable Diagram Number by one.
  • step 454 the subsystem 32 then determines if Diagram Number is equal to N, i.e. if all the diagrams in the sequence structure node have been executed. If not, the execution subsystem returns to step 4.48 and enqueues the self-reference node of the next Diagram Number on the run queue and sets node complete to false in step 450. If all the diagrams have been executed in step 454, then the subsystem 32 sets node complete to true and completes. It is noted that the node will be determined to have completed in step 322 (FIG. 9B), and thus the subsystem 32 will then proceed to step 324 to propagate its signals.
  • An asynchronous node is a node which is required to wait on external events before executing.
  • the node executed in step 310 is an asynchronous node then the following node specific functions are executed in step 320.
  • the execution subsystem 32 determines if the asynchronous node has entered execution 32 at starting point 0. If so, then in step 462 the execution subsystem 32 sets the node starting point to 1 so that a subsequent entry into this node will affect a negative choice in step 460.
  • the execution subsystem 32 provides the respective external device with information needed to asynchronously enqueue this node after external functions have completed.
  • this external device may be a timer or a device driver or it may be another node if an occurrence has been set.
  • this external device may be a timer or a device driver or it may be another node if an occurrence has been set.
  • this external device may be a timer or a device driver or it may be another node if an occurrence has been set.
  • this external device may be a timer or a device driver or it may be another node if an occurrence has been set.
  • step 466 the execution subsystem sets node complete to false and then in step 468 sets the desire to be requeued to false.
  • the node specific function for the asynchronous node then completes.
  • the asynchronous node will again be entered in step 460. If an occurrence has been set, the node will be re-entered in step 460 when the occurrence is triggered. For more information on this, please see the above-referenced application.
  • the asynchronous node starting point will be determined to be 1. When this occurs, node complete is set equal to true in step 470 and the node specific operation for the asynchronous node completes.
  • a long computational node can be described as a node which requires a large amount of computation and thus is required to share execution time with other nodes. Unlike other nodes, the long computational node includes any number of different starting points. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9K, the long computational node includes three different starting points referred to as 0, 1, and 2. Referring now to FIG. 9K, when the long computational node is first called, it enters at starting point 0, its initial starting point. In step 482 the execution subsystem 32 sets its starting point to a later point referred to as point 1. In step 484 the execution subsystem 32 begins computation on the long computational node, performing a portion of the computation required. In step 486 the subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 488 sets the desire to be requeued to true. The desire to be requeued is set to true because further computations are required to complete the node.
  • the execution subsystem 32 sets the starting point to 2.
  • the execution subsystem 32 performs further computations on the node.
  • the subsystem 32 sets node complete to false and sets the desire to be requeued to true, respectively.
  • step 497 the subsystem 32 finishes computation on the node and in step 498 sets node complete to true. It is again noted that additional similar stages may be present and a long computational node with 3 stages is shown only as an example.
  • step 499 the execution subsystem 32 enqueues the top level diagram's self-reference node on the run queue. This flowchart is necessary to place the first self-reference node on the run queue. Subsequent to this, the self-reference node places other nodes within respective self-reference node on the run queue. As data output signals are propagated, other nodes in turn are placed on the run queue and so forth.
  • the operation in FIG. 9L is necessary merely to place the initial self-reference node in the run queue to "kick things off.”
  • the first step in the execution of a virtual instrument is accomplished by executing its block diagram.
  • the first step in the execution of a block diagram is accomplished by scanning the terminals contained in the diagram's self-reference node. For each terminal which is the source of a signal, the data token is moved from the control reference by the terminal to the terminal itself.
  • the second step in the execution of a diagram is to initialize the token short-count of each node in the diagram to the number of input signals to that node, i.e. its fire count.
  • the third step in the execution of a diagram is to propagate signals from the self-reference node. Propagation of signals from a node is accomplished by scanning all of the node's terminals.
  • each terminal that is source of a signal the data token on the terminal is copied to each destination terminal of the signal path.
  • Each token placed on a destination terminal causes the short-count of the node containing the terminal to be decremented. If it becomes zero in the process, then that node is scheduled to execute.
  • the first step in the execution of a node is accomplished by copying the tokens from the node's terminals to the reference controls.
  • the second step depends upon the type of node. For an instrument use node that references a real-time virtual instrument, the next execution step is to copy the tokens from the node's controls to the virtual instrument's controls and to execute the virtual instrument. For an instrument use node that references previously stored data of a virtual instrument, the tokens from the appropriate data record are read in and placed on the node's terminals. For a sequence structure node, the next step is to execute the first subdiagram. For a conditional structure node, the next step is to execute the subdiagram indicated by the value of the token on the selected control.
  • next step is to set the value of the token on the iteration number control to zero and to execute the subdiagram.
  • the next step is to perform the next step in the execution of the node or the virtual instrument which contains the diagram that contains the self-reference node.
  • the third step in the execution of a node also depends upon the type of node. For an instrument use node or a conditional structure node the output data tokens are propagated along the signal paths. For a sequence structure node, the next subdiagram is executed, if one exists, and if not, the output tokens are propagated. For a loop structure node, the shift registers are clocked (the data is shifted), the iteration number incremented, and the subdiagram is reexecuted, if appropriate; otherwise the output tokens are propagated.
  • the second step in the execution of the virtual instrument is to log the tokens on the front panel controls if data logging is enabled.
  • the third step in the execution of the virtual instrument is to copy the tokens from the virtual instrument's indicators to the instrument use node's output terminals and to schedule the instrument use node to execute its next step.
  • the third step of virtual instrument execution is performed only if the virtual instrument was executed in response to an instrument use node request. If the virtual instrument was executed interactively, there is no third step.
  • FIG. 10 shows details of an illustrative front panel 62 which is produced using the front panel editor 36 and which is displayed using the keyboard and display 58. It will be appreciated that the illustration of FIG. 10 represents an actual graphical computer-generated display of an exemplary front panel for the instrument 60.
  • the graphical representation of FIG. 10 illustrates physical control dials and switches for providing variable input information and illustrates a coordinate plane type indicator for displaying variable output information. More particularly, FIG. 10 shows a circular turn-dial and a slide switch for setting input variable data. The turn-dial and slide switch each correspond to respective rectangular boxes for digitally illustrating variable input data in digital form.
  • the illustrative front panel also includes a display for illustrating variable output data.
  • the graphical representations of input controls and output indicators are stored in a memory library, and a user may select from among a variety of different graphical representations of input controls and output indicators in order to construct a panel display which conforms to a user's intuitive understanding of how the instrument 60 is controlled and how it provides data.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an icon 64 which can be used to reference a front panel (not shown).
  • a visual representation of the icon 64 can be produced using the icon editor 34.
  • the icon 64 corresponds to a particular front panel (not shown).
  • the icon 64 can be used as a building-block in a hierarchical system constructed using the block diagram editor 30.
  • the dashed lines of FIG. 11 indicate the one-to-one correspondence between the icon 64 and the respective two-dimensional regions (or hot spots) 66 and 68 which correspond to respective variable input data and variable output data illustrated by controls and displays of the corresponding front panel (not shown).
  • the front panel might include input data in the form a sequence of samples and might provide output data in the form of an indicator showing voltage reading per sample.
  • the icon 64 then might be divided into two two-dimensional regions 68 and 66 which respectively correspond to the input sample count and the voltage reading for that sample count.
  • FIGS. 12A-E show the graphical representations of structures utilized in constructing a block diagram as described below using the block diagram editor 30.
  • the structures represented in FIGS. 12A-E substantially facilitate the application of data flow programming techniques which are used in the preferred embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12A illustrates a sequence structure.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates an iterative loop structure.
  • FIG. 12C illustrates a conditional structure.
  • FIG. 12D illustrates an indefinite loop structure.
  • FIG. 12E illustrates a shift register on an indefinite loop structure.
  • FIGS. 12A-E can be stored in a memory library as can execution instructions corresponding to the respective structures.
  • a user can call upon a graphical structure library in order to display any one or more of the structures using the display facilities of the control processor 38 and keyboard and display 58 of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4.
  • the sequence structure which has its graphical representation illustrated in FIG. 12A, serves to divide a data-flow diagram into two subdiagrams, one representing an inside and another representing an outside of the sequence structure borders.
  • the outside diagram behaves exactly as if the sequence structure and its contents were replaced by an icon with a terminal (or hot spot) for each line crossing the sequence structure border.
  • the drawing of FIG. 12A shows a three-diagram sequence. In order to minimize space used on a computer console screen, only one diagram of the sequence structure is visible at a time. Inside the structure border, multiple diagrams (not shown) can be constructed which execute in sequence. The sequence of diagrams are indicated by the respective numbers in the respective sequence diagrams. When the first diagram (indicated by the number 0) in this sequence completes its execution, the next one begins. The process is repeated until all diagrams in the sequence have been executed.
  • Each diagram in the sequence uses a subset of incoming signal paths and produces a subset of outgoing signal paths (the outgoing subsets must be mutually exclusive, but the incoming subsets are arbitrary). Constants may be used with any of the diagrams without any constraints. Sequence variables indicated by rectangular boxes attached to the inside edge of the sequence structure (not shown in FIG. 12A) can be used multiple times in the diagrams following the diagram where the variable was assigned.
  • the sequence structure does not begin execution until all incoming signal paths have data available, and none of the outgoing signal paths produce data until all diagrams have completed execution.
  • FIG. 13 shows an illustrative block diagram 70 of a sequence structure.
  • the sequence structure is coupled to receive input signals on respective lines 72 and 74 and to provide respective output signals on respective lines 76, 78, and 80.
  • Input registers 82 and 84 are provided to collect input data.
  • a decoder 86 is provided to determine which computation and/or control element 88, 90, or 92 to select, and a sequence counter 94 is included to undertake a count for sequencing between respective elements 88, 90, and 92.
  • an output of AND gate 96 becomes TRUE. This starts computation in computation and/or control element 88 (assuming that it is the first element selected).
  • the control element 88 has completed computation, its output is stored in register 98.
  • the sequence counter 94 is free to advance by one.
  • the decoder 86 will select the second computation element 90.
  • the output of AND gate 96 will become TRUE again and, computation will begin in the second element 90.
  • the output of the second element 90 will be stored in output register 100.
  • the sequence repeats for the third element 92, and its output is stored in output register 102.
  • the output data from all computations will be available for further computation by other instruments (not shown) of a block diagram system as will be explained more fully below.
  • the iterative loop structure a graphical representation of which is shown in FIG. 12B is similar to the sequence structure in that the iterative loop structure partitions the data-flow graph into two parts.
  • the interior diagram contains the body of the loop. Signal paths crossing the border of an iteration loop structure typically have a transformation applied. Incoming data are indexed in the most significant dimension so that the data inside the structure have dimensionality one less than outside. Outgoing data has the inverse transformation performed.
  • the iterative loop structure is similar in operation to a for-next loop in a text-based program.
  • the number of iterations N
  • the iteration number or index i.
  • the number of iterations to be executed is automatically set by the size of the dimension being indexed for an incoming signal path (or the minimum of the indexed dimension sizes of all the incoming signal paths if there are more than one).
  • a scalar value must be specifically connected to the variable to specify the number of iterations.
  • the iteration number, i is similar to a constant within the diagram except that its value is 0 for the first iteration and increments by 1 at the end of each iteration.
  • Iteration Structures that have no data dependencies can, in principle, be executed in any order or completely in parallel except in the case where a non-reentrant virtual instrument is used by more than one structure.
  • Non-reentrant virtual instrument is a VI which controls an instrument or data acquisition card.
  • the iteration structures would be executed strictly sequentially, in accordance with data flow principles. All inputs must be available to start execution of an iteration loop. Furthermore, all outputs are generated after execution completes.
  • FIG. 14 there is shown a block diagram 104 for an iterative loop.
  • An iterative loop structure operates on data in an array one element at a time. The data for each element are sequentially stored in respective input buffers 106 and 108.
  • a counter 110 begins its count at 0.
  • the counter 110 will advance to 1, and the process will repeat for the second data element in the array. This process will repeat until the counter 110 reaches N-1 making a total of N computations.
  • a complete cycle signal will be generated by the comparator 118.
  • the output signals stored in the respective output buffers 114 and 116 then will be available for use by other computation instruments (not shown).
  • conditional structure a graphical representation of which is shown in FIG. 12C, is similar in appearance to the sequence structure in its use of screen space, but it differs in its handling of signal paths crossing its border in that in each case a diagram may use any subset of incoming signal paths, but must produce all outgoing signal paths.
  • all inputs must be available in order to start execution.
  • all outputs are generated after execution is completed.
  • the conditional structure is similar in operation to a case or switch statement used in certain text-based programming environments.
  • a Boolean-valued scalar is connected to the selector to select between case FALSE and case TRUE.
  • a scalar number is connected to the selector to select among diagram case 0, case 1, etc.
  • FIG. 15 illustrate a block diagram 120 corresponding to a conditional structure.
  • the block diagram 120 for the conditional structure is substantially similar to that of the block diagram 70 for the sequence structure.
  • the block diagram 120 for the conditional structure includes respective input registers 122 and 124, a decoder 126, an AND gate 128, three respective computation and/or control elements 120,132, and 134 and three respective output registers 136, 138, and 140 all coupled as shown in the drawings of FIG. 15.
  • the conditional structure block diagram 120 operates in a manner substantially similar to that of the sequence structure block diagram 70, except that the decoder 126 of block diagram 120 is directly controlled by the case selection input provided on line 142 to select only one diagram.
  • the indefinite loop structure is similar in concept to the iterative loop structure in that the interior of the structure diagram represents the body of the loop, but it differs in that signal paths crossing the border of the indefinite loop structure do not usually have an indexing transformation applied.
  • the indefinite loop structure is similar to a do-while loop in text-based programming languages.
  • iteration number or index i
  • continuation flag i
  • the iteration number starts at zero and increments by one at the end of each iteration.
  • a boolean value or expression is connected to the continuation flag.
  • TRUE means that another iteration will be performed. If the continuation flag is left unconnected, it is equivalent to connecting a FALSE constant.
  • all inputs must be available in order to start execution. Furthermore, outputs are generated after execution is complete.
  • FIG. 16 shows a block diagram 144 which corresponds to the graphical representation of an indefinite loop structure shown in FIG. 11.
  • an output of AND gate 150 will become TRUE to enable computation and/or control element 152.
  • output data are stored in respective output registers 154 and 156.
  • counter 158 increments, and the cycle begins again. This process continues until a continuation flag provided on line 160 goes FALSE. The output data are present after each cycle.
  • a special construction available for use only within the respective loop structures is the shift register.
  • a graphical representation of each respective loop structure type incorporating a shift register is shown in FIG. 12E.
  • the shift register eliminates the need for cycles in a data-flow graph, making the result easier to comprehend and to prove correct.
  • the shift register behaves as if it were an ordered set of two or more variables, all of the same type and dimensionality.
  • the first variable in a set is an output of the loop-body diagram and is located on the right border of the loop structure.
  • the other variables of the set are inputs to the loop-body diagram and are located on the left border of the structure at the same elevation.
  • the data from the shift register output variable are shifted into the first input variable, and the previous value of the first input variable is shifted into the second input variable.
  • FIG. 17 shows an illustrative block diagram 162 illustrating operation of an iterative loop structure including a shift register. Respective latches 164 and 166 are provided to implement the shift register.
  • the block diagram 162 of FIG. 17 (which represents an iterative loop structure with a shift register) operates similarly to the block diagram 104 of FIG. 14 (which represents an iterative loop structure minus a shift register) except that computation inputs are provided which give the system feedback from a previous cycle.
  • An output provided by loop counter 168 is sensed by the comparator 170.
  • the multiplexor control 172 selects preselect inputs from respective preset gates 174 and 176.
  • respective latches 164 and 166 are selected.
  • the selected input is fed into the computation and/or control element 178.
  • data from input buffer 180 also is fed into the computation element 178.
  • the computed output data are fed into respective output buffers 182 and 184.
  • the comparator 170 reaches N-1, the process is completed, and the output data can be passed to a next instrument (not shown).
  • a type descriptor is essentially a language or grammar for describing data types used in the preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 a diagram illustrating a type descriptor for a cluster containing an integer, a string, a character, and a float is shown.
  • the block diagram editor encodes this cluster in the following manner.
  • the first three elements in the type descriptor are a size word representing the size of the cluster, 22 bytes in this example; a word containing the number 50 representing a cluster code; and a word containing 4 for the number of elements within the cluster.
  • the next word contains the number 4 representing the size of the first element of the cluster in bytes followed by the code of the first element of the cluster, an integer, which is encoded as a 3.
  • the next element in the cluster also has a size of 4 bytes and it is a type string, which is encoded as a 30.
  • the third element has a size of 4 and is a character, so it is encoded as a 4,1.
  • the last element has a size of 4 and is encoded as a 10. Therefore, in summary, the type descriptor includes elements for size, data type code, and number of elements, as well as a size and code for each of the elements in the data structure.
  • FIGS. 19A-K illustrate computer screen displays during each successive step in a construction of an exemplary block diagram using the block diagram editor 30 such as that of FIGS. 2 or 4.
  • the front panel window appears on the left and the block diagram window appears on the right.
  • FIG. 19A a control knob is placed in the front panel, and its associated terminal automatically appears in the block diagram.
  • the system representation shows the virtual instrument with a diagram containing a self reference node, and a terminal in the self reference node which references the front panel control.
  • FIG. 19B a control graph indicator type is placed in the front panel, and its associated terminal automatically appears in the block diagram in the same position relative to the other terminal as the graph is to the knob. This makes it possible to distinguish the terminal even without supplementing the graphics with text labels.
  • FIG. 19C a constant with value 20 is placed in the block diagram. As shown in FIG. 20B, this is reflected in the system representation by another terminal and control attached to the self reference node.
  • FIG. 19D an icon referring to a built-in virtual instrument is placed in the block diagram.
  • An alternative view of the block diagram could show the icon terminals instead of the icon itself.
  • the system representation shows another node of instrument use type in the virtual instrument diagram and three terminals and controls corresponding to the terminals and controls in the referenced virtual instrument.
  • FIG. 19E an iterative loop structure is placed in the block diagram.
  • the system representation shows the structure node in the diagram along with terminals and controls for the loop variables. Note that the iteration number is accessible only from within the loop; while the iteration limit is available inside and outside the loop as evidenced by the two terminals which reference it, one in the structure node and the other in the self-reference node of the diagram within the structure node.
  • FIG. 19F an icon referencing another built-in virtual instrument is placed inside the iterative loop structure.
  • a wire is connected from the terminal associated with the front panel knob to the loop limit terminal of the loop structure.
  • the front panel knob terminal is determined to be the signal source.
  • FIG. 19H a wire is connected from the iteration number terminal to a terminal on the virtual instrument inside the loop.
  • This signal path lies completely within the loop structure subdiagram.
  • the system representation shows the signal path with the iteration number terminal and the terminal on the instrument use node. The iteration number terminal is determined to be the signal source.
  • the constant is wired to a terminal of the virtual instrument within the loop.
  • the wire crosses the structure border so that a pair of terminals and a control are created, and the wire is split into two signal paths, one outside the loop structure and one inside.
  • the constant is determined to be the source terminal of the outside signal, and the inside terminal at the border is determined to be the source of the inside signal.
  • a wire is drawn from the virtual instrument inside the loop to the virtual instrument outside the loop. This wire crosses the border so it is split into two signal paths.
  • the wire on the outside is thicker because it represents an array signal path (as will be explained more fully below).
  • the output of the virtual instrument outside the loop is connected to the terminal associated with the front panel graph.
  • the wire pattern indicates that it represents a cluster signal path (as will be explained more fully below).
  • FIG. 22 shows a drawing of a computer-generated display of a completed block diagram for the design example of FIG. 5A.
  • This block diagram is the graphical program representing the instrument's operation, showing the interconnections between the elements of the instrument, the signal paths, and the relationship to other virtual instruments.
  • four front panel inputs from controls are shown connected to the iteration loop.
  • the inputs to the iteration loop are the Number of Steps, High and Low Frequencies, and Amplitude.
  • the Number of Steps and High and Low Frequency inputs are connected to a Formula Node icon called "Calculate Frequency," which is comprised within the iteration loop.
  • This icon is a built-in function which in this example includes a formula that calculates a frequency.
  • the Number of Steps input is connected to the loop-count (the N at the upper left corner) of the iteration loop, which in turn, is connected to the variable N in the Formula Node.
  • the index i of the iteration loop is connected to the variable i of the Formula Node.
  • the High and Low Frequency inputs are connected to the Fh and Fl inputs of the Formula Node.
  • Tek and Fluke Two virtual instrument icons referred to as Tek and Fluke are also inside the iteration loop.
  • the Tek VI takes as input Amplitude and the frequency Fi output from the Formula Node and performs the appropriate IEEE-488 operations to set the function generator 208 of FIG. 5A.
  • the Fluke VI performs the appropriate IEEE-488 operations to obtain a voltage measurement from the multimeter 210 of FIG. 5A.
  • These two icons represent simple virtual instruments that are easily designed using built-in high level IEEE-488 functions to communicate with the multimeter 210.
  • the output from the multimeter (Fluke) icon is provided to logic nodes which convert from the RMS (root-mean square) value. This signal is output from the iteration loop and provided to nodes which convert the data to dB (decibel) form.
  • This output is then provided to a bundle node which also receives the output from the Formula Node.
  • the bundle node is a bundle by position node and acts to bundle the two arrays of data it receives, i.e., frequency and response for plotting purposes. This bundled data in then provided to an indicator on the front panel.
  • Each iteration of the iteration loop produces as output the input frequency and the corresponding voltage measurement. This results in two arrays of values which exit the loop at the right.
  • the bundle function converts these two arrays into X, Y plots which are then provided to the front panel graph indicator. Note the self-documenting effect of the graphical language, with the iteration loop structure contributing to the readability of the program.
  • the instrument is ready to be used.
  • the instrument is operated from the front panel.
  • the user simply configures the input controls and "clicks" the Run Arrow button on the top of the screen (as will be appreciated from the description below).
  • the graphical system and method described above permits the computer-aided modeling of a process using graphical techniques which generally are more easily comprehended, especially by persons who do not possess specialized skills in computer programming techniques.
  • the use of a computer-generated image of a front panel display permits a user to easily understand how data is provided to a system being modeled and how data is provided by the system.
  • the block diagram editor permits a user to construct a graphical representation of a procedure for producing output data from input data using icons which reference modularized procedural units. A user may use the icon editor to construct his own icons; or he may call upon a ready-made library of icons.
  • the execution subunit executes execution instructions which are constructed in response to the graphical images produced by a user to model a process.
  • a user can program a computer substantially by constructing a hierarchy of icons connected to one another so as to model a process.
  • a user therefore, can use the system and method of the present invention to program a computer to model a process using graphical techniques which generally are easier to comprehend.
  • system and method of the present invention advantageously can use data flow techniques.
  • the use of the structures illustrated in FIGS. 12A-E facilitates the use of such data flow techniques.
  • a system modelled in block diagram form can operate in a parallel fashion, since each individual icon in a hierarchy comprising such a block diagram operates as soon as all input data provided to it are available.
  • such structures render graphical representations of block diagrams using such data flow techniques more comprehensible to a user, and, therefore, simplify the task of using such techniques.
  • Diagram VIs are comprised of nodes, which are discussed with regard to FIGS. 9C-9K
  • a node begins execution when all its inputs are available. If a diagram has two or more icons referring to the same VI and a second one has all its inputs available before the first finishes execution, it is not always clear how to handle this second node. In fact, it depends on the "execution mode" of the VI. Absent some way to execute VIs in parallel, VIs would be executed in serial.
  • the second node In a serial mode of execution, the second node is placed on a FIFO wait queue of the self-reference node associated with the VI, and execution of the VI in the context of the second node is delayed until the execution in the context of the first node is completed.
  • Parallel or reentrant execution dynamically creates multiple instances of the VI at execution time in order to allow multiple nodes to execute in parallel.
  • parallel execution is implemented for VIs designated as reentrant by the user.
  • FIGS. 23 and 25 illustrate serial and parallel execution modes.
  • one "thermometer” icon must wait until the other finishes execution before it can start, even though it has all its inputs at the same time as the other. This is because the "thermometer” VI is a serial VI.
  • the asynchronous behavior of the wait VI (the watch icon)is shown. It is a code type VI that does not execute atomically. During the time that it is executing (waiting) other components of the diagram may execute.
  • both "wait” icons execute at the same time showing the parallel execution mode of the wait VI. If execution were not parallel either the "thermometer” VI or the "IMD/THD” VI would effectively wait for the sum of the time delay intervals caused by the two "wait” VIs together.
  • the preferred embodiment can be embodied in software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • One way to implement a parallel VI in hardware is to have enough instances of the hardware to account for the maximum number of VI instances that must run in parallel.
  • the present invention provides the ability of a virtual instrument (with icon, front panel, and diagram or code) to be a template and effectively automatically replicate itself as necessary in order to allow multiple instances to run in parallel.
  • a node is executed when all its inputs have data ready. When this happens the node is put on a list of ready nodes, i.e., is placed on the run queue. This is illustrated in FIG. 26. One by one the ready nodes are taken off the list and executed. When more than one of the ready nodes are I-use nodes which refer to the same virtual instrument the scheduling of the execution depends on the mode of the virtual instrument. The possible modes are serial and parallel.
  • Serial mode instruments place contending nodes on a list of nodes which execute the block diagram of the virtual instrument in turn.
  • This list of nodes is the self-reference node wait queue. Because the block diagram of an instrument consists of more nodes which will become ready, the execution of the block diagram instrument is not atomic. The nodes of the diagram are put onto the ready node list or run queue as they become ready and are "interleaved" with ready nodes from other diagrams. This is illustrated in FIG. 27.
  • the dashed box 318 once again contains the node on whose behalf the block diagram 322 of the virtual instrument is executing.
  • the node 324 outside the dashed box must wait for the diagram to complete before it gets its turn.
  • the arrow from the block diagram to the Ready Nodes list 326 shows that the block diagram 322 will produce more ready nodes which will be added to this list.
  • Block diagram instruments can be built to execute in parallel or reentrant mode.
  • the means of making parallel execution possible for block diagram instruments is by using the instrument as a template to make identical copies of the instrument automatically as needed for contending nodes.
  • Each block diagram then executes, producing ready nodes for the Ready Nodes list or run queue in such a way that the nodes can be "interleaved” and the execution of the identical diagrams takes place “at the same time.” This is illustrated in FIG. 28. Inside the dashed box 338 the replicated virtual instrument 340,342 is shown and each I-use node has "its own copy" of the instrument. Both diagrams are shown putting ready nodes onto the Ready Nodes 334 list.
  • the fundamental capability which execution states permit is the interactive operation of more than one virtual instrument at a time, as well as the construction or editing of some virtual instruments while others are executing.
  • VI When a VI is interactively started (i.e., run from its front panel) it enters its active state. It remains active until it completes, at which time it returns to its idle state. At the point it becomes active all lower level VIs are "reserved.” This prevents them from being changed (a change could result in an execution error).
  • a reserved VI executes in the context of one or more icon nodes within the diagrams of one or more higher level VIs. It is unreserved when all those higher level VIs become idle.
  • VIs can have their front panel and block diagram windows open while they execute. This ability to observe VIs at any and all levels of the hierarchy while they execute is a powerful troubleshooting aid. While a VI is reserved it may not be edited; however the values assigned to its front panel controls may be changed. Depending on the design of the VI and the point in time when the control value is changed such a change may produce unexpected results.
  • a "breakpoint” may be set so that a reserved VI enters its "suspended” state when it is about to execute.
  • "Suspended” is similar to idle in that the VI can be run interactively one or more times. However, a suspended VI can be resumed (passing its outputs back to the icon node) and reenter its reserved state. It can actually be resumed without running it at all. While it is suspended its indicators (outputs) can be modified as well as its controls (inputs). This capability enables top-down implementation and testing.
  • "Stub” VIs can be built (icons and front panels but no diagram or code), and their execution simulated by setting the breakpoint, supplying relevant outputs when the VI becomes suspended, and then resuming.
  • Breakpoints have been used in conventional programming languages, but there is no analogy in instrumentation systems.
  • a related but different analogy in instrumentation is remote/local loosely related to reserved/idle (no analogy to suspended).
  • Stubs are known in programming but not in hardware or instrumentation development.
  • the present invention provides the ability of VIs to exist in different states in order to protect execution from editing changes. Furthermore, it provides the ability to change the value of a VI indicator (output) while it is in its suspended state.
  • the type propagation code will set each signal to bad or normal.
  • the VI is not executable unless all its signals are normal. When a diagram is about to be executed, all its signals are set to their armed state. When a signal is propagated from its source node it is set to its normal state. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed signals are set to their normal states.
  • the linking code will set the node to bad or normal (a node is bad also if the link is good but the sub VI is not executable).
  • the owning VI is not executable unless all its nodes are normal.
  • all nodes are set to their armed states.
  • a node's short count is decremented to zero it is scheduled to run by being placed on the run queue. At that point the node is set to its fired state.
  • an instrument usage node is removed from the run queue and enqueued on the sub VI's self-reference node wait queue it is set to its pending state.
  • the calling node When the sub VI actually begins execution in the context of the calling node the calling node is set to its active state. When the sub VI completes normally and the calling node is dequeued from the VI's ready queue the calling node is set to this normal state. If the referenced VI is stopped in its suspended state or executing in its retrying state the calling node is set to its suspended state. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed nodes within it are set to their normal states.
  • the type propagation code sets the VI to its bad or normal state depending on the presence of bad signals or nodes (a serial VI is bad also if any sub VI is not executable, or if it or any sub VI contains a recursive reference to it).
  • the go button is hit the VI in the front window (panel or diagram) is set to its active state. At this point all of its subVIs and all of theirs, etc., are set to their reserved states.
  • the VI completes normally or with an error it is placed in its idle state.
  • the reset button is hit while the VI is in its active state it is placed in its idle state, and all nodes in their pending, active, or error states are reset (which may involve resetting their subVIs).
  • each of its subVIs still in its reserved state checks all its callers to see if it too can return to its idle state.
  • the VI has a breakpoint set or if it detects an error on a control then instead of being placed in its running state at the start of execution it is placed in its suspended state.
  • VI When a VI completes normally it is placed back in its reserved state. If a VI detects an error on an indicator the VI is placed in its suspended state. When the retry button is hit the VI is placed in the retrying state. If the VI then completes normally or with an error or if the reset button is hit it is placed in the suspended state. A suspended VI is placed in the reserved state when the resume button is hit.
  • Front panel controls can be adjusted in any VI state but the effects are nondeterministic except for the idle and suspended states. Edit changes to the front panel or block diagram are not allowed in any state except idle and bad.
  • the go button is inoperative except in the idle state.
  • the reset button is inoperative except in the active and retrying states.
  • the resume and retry buttons are inoperative except in the suspended state.
  • a parallel block diagram VI is similar to a serial VI except it has no suspended or retrying states.
  • a parallel VI actually begins execution in the context of a calling node a clone is created and placed in its running state.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates a clone. When the clone completes normally it is discarded. The clone is discarded also whenever it has to abort execution because its calling node is being reset. If the VI has a breakpoint set then instead of placing the clone in its running state it is placed in its suspended state.
  • the execution behavior of a VI clone is similar to that of a reserved serial VI.
  • FIG. 38 further explains execution states.
  • the flowchart included as Appendix B in U.S. Pat. No. 4,914,568 explains FIG. 38 with regard to a prior embodiment and is incorporated herein by this reference.
  • the fundamental capability which execution states provide is the interactive operation of more than one virtual instrument at a time, as well as the construction or editing of virtual instruments while others are executing.
  • the execution state diagram is shown in FIG. 39. State information is maintained internally for each virtual instrument. When the VI is in the front window, the state information for that VI is shown on the control palette by the one or two controls shown within each state in FIG. 39.
  • VI When the VI is interactively started (i.e., run from its front panel) it enters its active state. It remains active until it completes, at which time it returns to its idle state. At the point it becomes active, all lower level VIs are "reserved.” This prevents them from being changed (a change could result in an execution error).
  • a reserved VI executes in the context of one or more icon nodes within the diagrams of one or more higher level VIs. It is unreserved when all those higher level VIs become idle.
  • VIs can have their front panel and block diagram windows open while they execute. This ability to observe VIs at any and all levels of the hierarchy while they execute is a powerful trouble-shooting aid. While a VI is reserved it may not be edited; however the values assigned to its front panel controls may be changed. Depending on the design of the VI and the point in time when the control values is changed such a change may produce unexpected results.
  • FIGS. 40 and FIG. 41 show five VIs in various stages of execution.
  • the purpose of this example is to show how the change in state in one VI may cause state changes in other VIs, both above and below in the hierarchy.
  • FIG. 41 shows the execution states of all of the VIs after VI 1 is interactively started. Notice the changes caused in the execution states of VI 1's subVIs, VI 2 and VI 3, which are now reserved. They may not be edited or executed interactively. Notice also the state of VI 4. It is in the bad VI state because a sub-VI is active. VI 4 may not be executed interactively, but editing is allowed. If VI 4 was allowed to be executed interactively, it would attempt to reserve VI 1, which is already active.
  • VI 5 has not changed states. It may be edited or executed interactively. One of its subVIs is reserved, but that does not affect the state of VI 5.
  • Setting breakpoints is a useful debugging tool. Stopping on a breakpoint is implemented with execution states.
  • a "breakpoint" may be set so that a reserved VI enters its "suspended" state when it is about to execute. Suspended is similar to idle in that the VI can be run interactively one or more times. However, a suspended VI can be resumed (passing its outputs back to the icon node) and reenter its reserved state. It can actually be resumed without running it at all. While it is suspended its indicators (outputs) can be modified as well as its controls (inputs). This capability enables top-down implementation and testing.
  • "Stub" VIs can be built (icons and front panels but no diagram or code) and their execution simulated by setting the breakpoint, supplying relevant outputs when the VI becomes suspended, and then resuming.
  • Breakpoints are known in conventional programming languages, but there is no analogy in instrumentation systems. Stubs are prior art in programming but not in hardware or instrumentation development.
  • FIG. 40 shows the control palette execution state buttons corresponding to the VIs when VI 3 becomes suspended.
  • a breakpoint was set on VI 3, and execution is suspended before it is executed. VII is still active, VI 2 is running, and VI 3 is suspended. The VI states of VI 4 and VI 5 do not change.
  • the system is protected from executing with an error on the block diagram (wiring error). If the VI is in the bad state, the VI may not be executed interactively, or programmatically by a higher level instrument. When a VI becomes bad, all of its callers are also bad because they now contain a bad sub VI. When a VI changes from bad to idle, all of its callers are notified of the state change and they must check to see if any of their subVIs are still bad. This guarantees that when a VI is interactively executed, it does not contain errors on the block diagram or any subVI block diagrams.
  • the present invention provides the ability of VIs to exist in different states in order to protect execution from editing changes. Furthermore, the ability of VIs to have a breakpoint and suspended state enable top-down implementation (running a top level VI without having all the subVIs finished yet). Also, it provides the ability to change the value of a VI indicator (output) while it is in its suspended state.
  • VIs virtual instruments
  • VIs virtual instruments
  • the front panel is the means of setting input values and viewing outputs from the VI block diagram. Because the front panel is analogous to a front panel of a real instrument, the inputs are called controls and the outputs are called indicators. However, the term "control” is also used in this specification to mean both controls and indicators for convenience. A variety of controls and indicators, such as knobs, switches, buttons, charts, graphs, and so on can be used to make the front panel easily identifiable and understandable. An example of the front panel for a Temperature VI is illustrated in FIG. 42.
  • Each front panel has an accompanying block diagram, which is the VI program.
  • the block diagram is built using a graphical programming environment, and the block diagram can be thought of as source code in this environment.
  • the components of the block diagram represent program nodes that are "wired" together to show the flow of data within the block diagram.
  • the block diagram for the Temperature VI is shown in FIG. 43.
  • an icon connector is the means by which a VI is turned into an object that can be used in the block diagrams of other VIs as if it were a subroutine.
  • the icon graphically represents the VI in the block diagram of other VIs.
  • the connector terminals determine where the inputs and outputs on the icon must be wired.
  • the terminals are analogous to parameters of a subroutine. They correspond to the controls and indicators on the front panel of the VI.
  • FIG. 44 shows the icon and connector for the Temperature VI.
  • the connector is usually hidden under the icon until the user chooses to view it.
  • a powerful feature of the preferred embodiment lies in the hierarchical nature of the VI. Once a VI is created, it can be used as a subVI in the block diagram of a higher-level VI. There is no limit on the number of layers in the hierarchy.
  • the VI illustrated in FIGS. 45 and 46 uses the Temperature VI as a subVI in its block diagram. The front panel for this VI is shown in FIG. 45 and the block diagram is shown in FIG. 46. Referring to FIG. 45, the Temperature VI collects data, and then the top-level VI graphs the results. The user specifies the number of measurements and the delay between each measurement on the top-level VI front panel.
  • the top-level VI block diagram illustrated in FIG. 46 shows the Temperature VI in a loop.
  • the VI collects the measurement during each iteration of the loop. After the loop has executed a specified number of times, the VI passes the data to an icon that graphs it on the front panel of the top-level VI. Therefore, in the preferred embodiment, a VI can be used as a subVI. This makes block diagrams modular, and easy to debug, understand, and maintain.
  • the Panel window displays the VI front panel and is one of the two windows used to build a VI in the preferred embodiment.
  • the other window, the Diagram window contains the block diagram.
  • Front panels and block diagrams comprise collections of graphical objects which represent programming elements. Front panels contain various types of controls and indicators. Block diagrams contain terminals corresponding to front panel controls and indicators, as well as constants, functions, subVIs, structures, and wires that carry data from one object to another. FIG. 47 shows a front panel and its associated block diagram.
  • Both the Panel and Diagram windows contain a palette of command buttons and status indicators that are used for controlling the VI.
  • One of two palettes is available depending on whether the user is operating in run or edit mode.
  • the palette illustrated in FIG. 48 appears at the top of the window when the VI is in run mode.
  • This panel includes, from left to right, icons referred to as the Run button, the Mode button, the Continuous Run button, the Breakpoint button, the Step Mode button, the Execution Highlighting button, the Print Mode button, and the Datalogging button.
  • the Mode button switches operation of the block diagram editor between run mode and edit mode.
  • run mode the user can execute but not edit a VI.
  • edit mode the user can create and change a VI.
  • the button appears differently depending on whether the program is in run mode (FIG. 50A) or edit mode (FIG. 50B).
  • the user desires to run the VI from the edit mode without setting other options in the run mode palette, the user clicks on the run arrow (FIG. 49A). If necessary, the execution subsystem compiles the VI first, then switches to run mode, runs the VI, and returns to edit mode after the VI has run.
  • Step Mode button (FIG. 53A) to enable single-step mode.
  • the button changes appearance as indicated in FIG. 53B, and the Step button (FIG. 53C) appears besides it.
  • Execution ttighlighting button (FIG. 54A) to enable execution highlighting.
  • the button changes its appearance to that illustrated in FIG. 54B, and the flow of data can be viewed through the block diagram.
  • Execution highlighting is commonly used with single-step mode discussed above to trace the flow of data in the block diagram.
  • the button changes to indicate when data logging is active, and a complementary button (FIG. 56C) indicates that data is logged in a log file.
  • this palette contains the tools needed to build and operate VIs. These tools include from left to right the Operating tool, Positioning tool, Labeling tool, Wiring tool, and Coloring tool. After a tool is selected from the menu, the mouse cursor takes its shape.
  • the Operating tool (FIG. 58A) is used to manipulate front panel controls and indicators. As shown in FIG. 58B, the tool changes when it passes over a text-based control such as a digital or string control.
  • the Positioning tool (FIG. 59A) is used to select, move, or resize objects.
  • the tool changes form when it passes over a corner of a resizable object, as illustrated in FIG. 59B and 59C.
  • the Labeling tool appears as shown in FIG. 60B and is used to enter text into labels or create free labels.
  • the tool changes to the form illustrated in FIG. 60C when the user creates free labels.
  • the Wiring tool (FIG. 61 ) is used to wire objects together on the block diagram.
  • the Coloring tool (FIG. 62) is used to color an object.
  • FIG. 62B shows the alternate form of the coloring tool when the user wishes to set the color of the tool from the object.
  • Help Window When any tool is placed over a subVI or function icon, information pertaining to the particular subVI or function is displayed in the Help Window. It is noted that the user must first select Show Help Window from the Windows menu to do so.
  • the menu used most often in the preferred embodiment is the pop-up menu. Nearly all the objects required to build VIs require pop-up menus for selection and modification. The action of accessing a pop-up menu is known as "popping-up.”
  • the menu bar at the top of the screen illustrated in FIG. 63 contains several pull-down menus.
  • the pull-down menus contain options common to most applications, such as Open, Save, Copy, and Paste, as well as many others.
  • FIG. 63 shows the menu bar when the Panel window is active.
  • the Functions menu replaces the Controls menu when the Diagram window is active.
  • options in the File menu are used primarily to open, close, save, and print VIs.
  • the New option creates a new VI and opens its panel.
  • the Open . . . option opens an existing Vt.
  • the Close option closes the active window.
  • the Save A Copy As . . . option saves a copy of the current VI under a new name.
  • the Save with Options . . . option allows options for saving VIs without hierarchy and/or block diagrams.
  • the Revert . . . option reverts the current VI to the last saved version.
  • the Page Setup . . . option sets configuration options for the printer.
  • the Page Layout . . . option sets options for printing the VI.
  • the Print Preview . . . option displays selected VI components as they appear when printed.
  • the Print . . . option prints selected components of the current VI.
  • the Data Logging option displays data logging options.
  • the Get Info . . . option displays a dialog box containing information on the current VI.
  • the Edit VI Library . . . option removes VIs in a library or rearranges VI palette order.
  • the Mass Compile . . . option compiles all VIs in a library.
  • the Import Picture . . . option imports graphics files.
  • the Build Application . . . option builds a stand-alone application using Application Builder (optional).
  • the Quit or Exit option quits operation.
  • the options in the Edit menu are used to build the front panel and block diagram of a VI.
  • the UNDO option restores the current VI to its state immediately prior to the last editing step (currently not implemented).
  • the Cut option removes the selected object and places it on the Clipboard.
  • the Copy option copies the selected object and places it on the Clipboard.
  • the Paste option places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the active window.
  • the Clear option deletes the selected object.
  • the Remove Bad Wires option deletes all faulty wiring connections.
  • the Panel Order . . . option changes the order number for front panel objects interactively.
  • the Edit Control . . . option invokes the Control Editor.
  • the Alignment option aligns selected items using a selected Alignment axis.
  • the Align option aligns the selected items by the current Alignment setting.
  • the Distribution option distributes selected items using a selected Distribution setting.
  • the Distribute option spaces the selected items by the current Distribution setting.
  • the Move Forward option moves selected item one position higher in the stack.
  • the Move Backward option moves the selected item one position lower in the stack.
  • the Move to Front option moves the selected item to the top of the stack.
  • the Move to Back option moves the selected item to the bottom the stack.
  • the Preferences . . . option sets preferences for memory, disk, and display.
  • the Move Forward, Move Backwared, Move to Front, and Move to Back options are useful when multiple objects are "stacked up" so that they overlap. This is a useful feature for creating certain visual effects on the front panel.
  • the Run option executes the current VI.
  • the Stop option stops execution of the current VI.
  • the Change to Run Mode option toggles between Run mode and Edit mode. (In run mode the menu item reads "Change to Edit Mode")
  • the Make Current Values Default option makes current values the default on all controls and indicators.
  • controls and indicators are added to the front panel via the Controls menu.
  • Each option in the menu displays a palette of available controls and indicators for that selection.
  • the Controls menu is available only when the Panel window is active.
  • the Numeric option displays controls and indicators for numeric data.
  • the Boolean option displays controls and indicators for Boolean values.
  • the String option displays controls and indicators for ASCII character strings.
  • the Array & Cluster option displays controls and indicators that group sets of data types.
  • the Graph option displays indicators that plot numeric data in graph or real time chart form.
  • the Path & RefNum option displays controls for file paths and refnums.
  • the Decoration option displays graphical objects that enhance the panel display.
  • the Control . . . option displays a dialog box to load custom controls.
  • the Picture option displays indicators for drawing graphical objects.
  • the Windows menu is used to locate opened windows quickly and to open windows of subVIs and calling VIs.
  • the Show Diagram option makes the diagram window active. (When the diagram is active, the menu item reads "Show Panel")
  • the Show Help Window displays the help window for block diagram function and VIs. (When the Help Window is visible the menu item reads "Hide Help Window")
  • the Show Clipboard option displays the contents of the clipboard. (if clipboard visible then “hide ”)
  • the Tile option displays the front panel and block diagram of a VI side by side.
  • the Full Size option uses the entire screen to display the active window.
  • the About LabVIEW . . . option displays a dialog box with the LabVIEW version number.
  • the preferred embodiment of the graphical dataflow programming environment is marketed under the trademark LabVIEW®.
  • the Show VI Hierarchy option graphically displays the calling hierarchy of all VIs in memory. (if hierarchy window visible, menu reads "hide hierarchy window”)
  • the This VI's Callers and the This VI's Callees options displays a palette of VIs that call the current VI and a palette of subVIs of the current VI, respectively.
  • the Unopened SubVIs option displays a palette of subVIs that are unopened
  • Unopened Type Defs option . . . allows the user to open a file containing the original of a type definition.
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/125,459 titled “Method and Apparatus for Providing Improved Type Compatibility Checking Data Structure Variable Referencing in a Graphical Data Flow Program," filed Sep. 22, 1993, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
  • the Text menu is used to change the font, style, and color of text.
  • the Apply Font option displays options to let the user choose from predefined font styles.
  • the Font option displays available fonts.
  • the Size option displays font sizes.
  • the Style option displays font styles such as plain, bold, italic, and underline.
  • the Justify option displays options to justify text such as left, center, and right.
  • the Color option displays a color palette to color text.
  • the Functions menu illustrated in FIG. 71 replaces the Controls menu from the Panel window menu bar. All other menu selections are identical.
  • the user builds the block diagram with the Functions menu.
  • Each option in the menu displays a palette of available icons for that option.
  • the Functions menu is only available when the Diagram window is active.
  • the Structs & Constants option displays program control structures, such as For Loops and constants.
  • the Arithmetic option displays arithmetic and logical functions.
  • the Trig & Log option displays trigonometric and logarithmic functions.
  • the Comparison option displays functions to compare numbers, Booleans, or strings.
  • the Conversion option displays functions to convert from one data type to another.
  • the String option displays functions to manipulate strings.
  • the Array & Cluster option displays function to process arrays and graph data.
  • the File I/O option displays functions for reading and writing files.
  • the Dialog & Date/Time option displays functions for operator dialog, timing, and time/date acquisition.
  • the Miscellaneous option displays miscellaneous functions.
  • the VI . . . option invokes the Select File dialog box, from which you can select any VI.
  • the Analysis option displays analysis VIs.
  • the DAQ option displays data acquisition VIs (for plug-in data acquisition boards).
  • the GPIB option displays VIs for controlling the GPIB interface.
  • the Basics Course option displays VIs used in the Basic training course manual.
  • the Network option displays VIs for communicating over a network.
  • the Picture option displays VIs for creating pictures.
  • the Serial option displays Vls for controlling a serial port.
  • the tutorial option displays VIs used in the tutuorial manual.
  • the Utility option displays utility VIs.
  • VIs have three main pans: the front panel, the block diagram, and the icon/connector.
  • the front panel and the block diagram are discussed here, and the icon/connector is discussed below.
  • Controls are the means of supplying data to the VI. Indicators display data that the VI generates. There are several types of controls and indicators. These include numeric, Boolean (True-False), string, array and cluster, and graph. Controls and indicators are added to the front panel through the Controls menu.
  • Popping up is the preferred method for placing objects on the Panel and Diagram windows. If a free area in the Panel window is popped up on, the Controls menu is accessed. Similarly, if a free area in the Diagram window is popped up on, the Functions menu is accessed. This method is not only quicker than moving the cursor to the panel palette, but the selected item will appear where the cursor is positioned instead of at the center of the window.
  • Numeric controls are used to enter numeric quantities, while numeric indicators display numeric quantities.
  • the two most commonly used numeric objects are the digital control and the digital indicator illustrated in FIG. 72.
  • Boolean controls and indicators are used to enter and display Boolean (True-False) values.
  • Boolean objects simulate switches, buttons, and LEDs. The most commonly used Boolean objects are the vertical switch and the round LED illustrated in FIG. 73.
  • controls and indicators can be configured using options from their pop-up menus. Popping up on individual components of controls and indicators displays menus for customizing those components. This method is illustrated in FIG. 74 for a digital control.
  • the block diagram is composed of nodes, terminals, and wires.
  • Nodes are program execution elements and nodes are analogous to statements, functions, and subroutines in conventional, text-based programming languages.
  • Functions are the built-in nodes for performing elementary operations such as adding numbers, file I/O, or string formatting.
  • SubVI nodes are VIs that are designed by the user and later called from the diagram of another VI. Structures such as For Loops and While Loops control the flow of the program.
  • CINs are interfaces between the block diagram and user-supplied code written in a text-based programming language.
  • FIG. 75 shows a VI that has two function nodes, one that adds two numbers and one that subtracts them.
  • Terminals are ports through which data passes between the block diagram and the front panel and between nodes of the block diagram. Terminals are analogous to parameters and constants. There are two types of terminals--control or indicator terminals and node terminals. Control and indicator terminals belong to front panel controls and indicators. The values that an operator or a calling VI enters into these controls pass to the block diagram through these terminals when the VI executes. When the VI finishes executing, the output data passes from the block diagram to the front panel through the indicator terminals. Control and indicator terminals are automatically created or deleted when a front panel control or indicator is created or deleted.
  • the block diagram of the example VI in FIG. 75 shows terminals belonging to four front panel controls and indicators. Like VIs, the Add and Subtract functions also have node terminals which underlie the icon. The terminal pattern for the Add function and the Subtract function is also illustrated in FIG. 75.
  • Wires are data paths between terminals and are analogous to variables in conventional languages. Data flows in only one direction, from a source terminal to one or more destination terminals. Different wire patterns represent different data types, as shown in FIG. 76. On a color monitor each data type appears in a different color for emphasis. Examples of the more common wire types are also shown in FIG. 76.
  • a node executes only when data is available at all its input terminals; the node supplies data to all of its output terminals when it finishes; and the data passes immediately from source to destination terminals.
  • Data flow contrasts with the control flow method of executing a conventional program, in which instructions execute in the sequence in which they are written.
  • FIG. 77 The block diagram for such a VI is shown in FIG. 77.
  • the block diagram executes from left to right, not because the objects are placed in that order, but because one of the inputs of the Subtract function is not valid until the Multiply function has multiplied the numbers together and passed the data to the Subtract function.
  • a node executes only when data is available at all of its input terminals, and it supplies data to its output terminals only when it finishes.
  • VI one key to creating applications in the preferred embodiment is understanding and using the hierarchical nature of the VI. That is, once a VI is created, it can be used as a subVI in the block diagram of a higher-level VI.
  • the user When creating an application, the user should start at the top-level VI and define the inputs and outputs for the application. Then, subVIs are constructed to perform the necessary operations on the data as it flows through the block diagram. If a block diagram has a large number of icons, they should be grouped into a lower-level VI to maintain the simplicity of the block diagram. This modular approach makes applications easy to debug, understand, and maintain.
  • a VI used as a subVI needs an icon to represent it in the block diagram of a calling VI.
  • the subVI also must have a connector with terminals to pass data to and from the higher-level VI.
  • Every VI has a default icon displayed in the upper-right corner of the Panel and Diagram windows.
  • the default icon is a blank frame.
  • the Icon Editor is used to design the icon by turning individual pixels on and off. To activate the Icon Editor, pop up on the blank icon in the top right corner of the Panel window and select Edit Icon as shown in FIG. 81. It is noted that the menu is available only in the edit mode.
  • the window illustrated in FIG. 82 appears.
  • the tools shown on the left side of the illustration are used to create the icon design in the fat pixel editing area.
  • the actual-size icon image appears in one of the boxes to the right of the editing area.
  • the connector is the programmatic interface to a VI. Data passes from front panel controls and to front panel indicators via the connector terminals. Connections are defined by choosing the number of terminals desired for the VI and assigning a front panel control or indicator to each of those terminals. If the panel controls or indicators are used programmatically, these controls or indicators need terminals on the connector pane.
  • Show Connector is selected from the icon pane pop-up menu, as illustrated in FIG. 83.
  • the Diagram window does not have a connector pane.
  • the connector replaces the icon in the upper-right corner of the Panel window, as shown in FIG. 84.
  • the block diagram editor tries to select a terminal pattern for the VI with as many terminals on the left of the connector pane as controls on the front panel, and as many terminals on the right of the connector pane as indicators on the front panel.
  • Each rectangle on the connector represents a terminal area, and the rectangles may be used for either input to or output from the VI. If necessary, different terminal patterns can be selected for the VI.
  • Front panel controls and indicators are assigned to the terminals using the wiring tool. The following steps detail the method to follow in order to associate the connector pane with the front panel controls and indicators.
  • Steps 1 and 2 are repeated for each control and indicator to be connected.
  • control or indicator first and then select the terminal.
  • a pattern can be chosen with more terminals than necessary. Unassigned terminals do not affect the operation of the VI. There can also be more front panel controls than terminals.
  • Any VI that has an icon and a connector may be used as a subVI in the block diagram of another VI.
  • VIs to be used as subVIs are selected from the VI . . . option of the Functions menu as shown in FIG. 89. Choosing this option produces a file dialog box, from which any VI in the system can be selected. If a VI is opened that does not have an icon and a connector, a blank square box appears in the calling VI's block diagram. This node cannot be wired to.
  • a subVI is analogous to a subroutine.
  • a subVI node icon/connector, i.e., I-use node
  • the subVI node is not the subVI itself, just as a subroutine call statement in a text-based program is not the subroutine itself.
  • a block diagram that contains several identical subVI nodes calls that subVI several times.
  • a VI used as a subVI may be opened from the calling VI block diagram.
  • the Panel window of the subVI is opened by double-clicking on the subVI icon.
  • the Diagram window can then be opened by selecting Show Diagram from the Windows menu.
  • the Help window shows the subVI icon with wires attached to each terminal.
  • An example is shown in FIG. 90. Show Help Window is first selected and then an editing tool is placed on the subVI to display the wiring diagram. After choosing the Help window, the Diagram window must be clicked on to make it active.
  • While Loop which is referred to in FIG. 12D as an indefinite loop structure, is placed in the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71).
  • the While Loop is a resizable box used to execute the diagram inside it until the Boolean value passed to the conditional terminal is FALSE.
  • the VI checks the conditional terminal at the end of each iteration; therefore, the While Loop always executes once.
  • the iteration terminal is an output numeric terminal that contains the number of times the loop has executed.
  • the While Loop is equivalent to the following pseudo-code: ##STR1## In the example shown in FIG. 93, the While Loop executes until the value output from the subVI is less than 10 or the Enable Boolean is FALSE. (The And function outputs a TRUE only if both inputs are TRUE; otherwise it outputs a FALSE.)
  • the For Loop which is referred to in FIG. 12B as an iterative loop structure, is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71).
  • the For Loop is a resizable box, and it executes the diagram inside its border a predetermined number of times.
  • the For Loop has two terminals: the count terminal (an input terminal) and the iteration terminal (an output terminal).
  • the count terminal specifies the number of times (N) to execute the loop.
  • the iteration terminal contains the number of times (i) the loop has executed.
  • FIG. 95 shows a For Loop that generates 100 random numbers and displays the points on a waveform chart. It is noted that the loop timing of For Loops and While Loops can be controlled using a function referred to as "Wait Until Next ms Multiple.” This function ensures that no iteration is shorter than a specified number of milliseconds.
  • numerics can be represented as integers (byte, word, or long) or floating-point numbers (single, double, or extended precision).
  • the default representation for a numeric is double precision floating point.
  • the block diagram editor converts one of the terminals to the same representation as the other terminal. As a reminder, the editor places a gray dot, called a coercion dot, on the terminal where the conversion takes place.
  • the terminal representation is a long integer. If a double-precision floating-point number is wired to the count terminal, the block diagram editor converts the number to a long integer.
  • the VI converts floating-point numbers to integers
  • the VI rounds to the nearest integer.
  • x.5 is round to the nearest even integer. For example, 2.5 is rounded to 2 and 3.5 is rounded to 4.
  • shift registers are local variables that transfer values from one iteration to the next.
  • a shift register is created by popping up on the left or right loop border and selecting Add Shift Register from the pop-up menu.
  • the shift register contains a pair of terminals directly opposite each other on the vertical sides of the loop border.
  • the right terminal stores the data upon the completion of an iteration. That data is shifted at the end of the iteration and it appears in the left terminal at the beginning of the next iteration (see FIG. 98).
  • a shift register can hold any data type--numeric, Boolean, string, array, and so on. The shift register automatically adapts to the data type of the first object that is wired to the shift register.
  • the shift register can be configured to remember values from several previous iterations. This feature is very useful when averaging data points. Additional terminals are created to access values from previous iterations by popping up on the left terminal and choosing Add Element from the pop-up menu. For example, if three elements are added to the left ternfinal, values can be accessed from the last three iterations.
  • the initial value is wired to the left terminal of the shift register (outside the While Loop). If the initial value is left unwired, the initial value will be the default value for the shift register data type. For example, if the shift register data type is Boolean, the initial value will be FALSE. Similarly, if the shift register data type is numeric, the initial value will be zero.
  • the Case Structure shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 are analogous to case statements or if . . . then . . . else statements in conventional, text-based programming languages.
  • the Case Structure is configured like a deck of cards; only one case is visible at a time. Each case contains a subdiagram. Only one case executes depending on the value wired to the selector terminal.
  • the selector terminal can be either numeric or Boolean as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, respectively. If the data type is Boolean, the structure has a True case and a False case. If the data type is numeric, the structure can have up to 2 31 -1 l cases.
  • FIG. 104 is an example of a Boolean Case structure.
  • the numbers pass through tunnels to the Case structure, and are either added or subtracted, depending on the value wired to the selector terminal. If the Boolean wired to the selector terminal is FALSE, the VI will add the numbers; otherwise, the VI will subtract the numbers.
  • the Sequence Structure is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71).
  • the Sequence Structure looks like a frame of film, and it operates to execute diagrams sequentially.
  • the program statements execute in the order in which they appear.
  • a node executes when data is available at all of the node inputs.
  • the Sequence Structure is a method of controlling the order in which nodes execute. The diagram to be executed first is placed inside the border of Frame 0, the diagram to be executed second is placed inside the border of Frame 1, and so on. As with the Case Structure, only one frame is visible at a time.
  • Sequence locals are variables that pass data between frames of a Sequence structure. Sequence locals can be created on the border of a frame. the data wired to a frame sequence local is then available in subsequent frames. The data, however, is not available in frames preceding the frame in which the sequence local was created.
  • FIG. 107 shows a three-frame Sequence structure.
  • a sequence local in Frame 1 passes the value that the Tick Count (ms) function returns.
  • the Tick Count (ms) function returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since power on.) Note that this value is available in Frame 2 (as the arrow pointing into Frame 2 indicates). Also note that the VI displays only one sequence frame at a time.
  • the Formula Node is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71).
  • the user can directly enter a complicated formula, or formulas, in lieu of creating block diagram subsections.
  • the input and output terminals of the Formula Node are created by popping up on the border of the node and choosing Add Input (Add Output) from the pop-up menu.
  • the formula or formulas are entered inside the box.
  • Each formula statement must terminate with a semicolon (;).
  • the waveform chart is a special numeric indicator that displays one or more plots.
  • the waveform chart is in the Graph palette of the Controls menu. Waveform charts may display single or multiple traces. An example of a multiple-plot waveform chart is shown in FIG. 111.
  • the waveform chart has three update modes--strip chart, scope chart, and sweep chart.
  • the update mode can be selected by popping up on the waveform chart and choosing one of the options from the Data Operation Update Mode menu. (In the run mode, Update Mode from the chart pop-up menu is selected.)
  • the strip chart has a scrolling display similar to a paper strip chart.
  • the scope chart and the sweep chart have retracing displays similar to an oscilloscope. Because there is less overhead in retracing a plot, the scope chart and the sweep chart are significantly faster than the strip chart in displaying plots.
  • On the scope chart when the plot reaches the right border of the plotting area, the plot is erased, and plotting begins again from the left border.
  • the sweep chart acts much like the scope chart, but the display does not blank when the data reaches the right border. Instead, a moving vertical line marks the beginning of new data and moves across the display as new data is added.
  • a scalar output can be directly wired to a waveform chart.
  • the data type displayed in the waveforms chart's terminal icon matches the input type, as shown in FIG. 113.
  • Waveform charts can accommodate more than one plot.
  • the data must be bundled together using the Bundle function (Array & Cluster menu).
  • the Bundle function "bundles" or groups the output of the three different VIs that acquire temperature for plotting on the waveform chart. It is noted that the waveform chart terminal icon changes. To add more plots, the number of Bundle function input terminals are increased by resizing the Bundle function using the Positioning tool.
  • a data source is connected to a data sink by means of a wire.
  • the data sink can only receive information from the data source when the source has finished its computation. In other words, the data sink cannot begin execution until the source has completed.
  • a local or global variable according to the present invention must be used for this purpose.
  • a local variable is local to a particular VI and cannot be associated by other VIs. If the two objects are in different VIs, then a global variable must be used.
  • a local variable capability which enables a user to more effectively create block diagram programs and model processes in a graphical programming environment.
  • One benefit of this local variable capability is that a user is allowed to use local variables in their respective VIs which are not affected by other VIs or other block diagrams. This provides a cleaner programming environment and ensures that a user's local variable will not be affected by undesirable changes in other parts of the block diagram.
  • a second benefit of the local variable capability of the present invention is that a user can have multiple functions, such as loops, operating wherein each function can potentially affect the input or output to a control or indicator.
  • multiple loops executing concurrently can each affect the input or output to a control or indicator as desired.
  • only one terminal to a control was provided and thus only one function could affect the input and output to a control or indicator.
  • a third benefit of the present invention is that a read/write control is available to allow the user to more effectively interact with the front panel.
  • a read/write control is defined as a control that the user can read and/or change while the program is executing and that the block diagram can read and/or change during execution.
  • the user can read and/or change the control during execution and the user can program a block diagram providing the block diagram with the capability to read and/or change the control programmatically during execution.
  • the local variable capability of the present invention essentially allows input/output control for controls.
  • a local variable is associated with a control on the front panel of a VI. Therefore, a VI must exist before a local variable is created.
  • the Local Variable option is selected from the Structs and Constants menu.
  • the Structs and Constants menu is illustrated in FIG. 116.
  • a node that looks like that shown in FIG. 117 appears. If the user "pops up" on the node, he can select the control he wants to read or set from a list of all the top-level front panel controls and indicators. The list is derived from the owned labels of front panel controls and indicators. Thus, the user should label his front panel controls and indicators with descriptive names, using owned labels. It is noted that if controls and indicators are on the front panel, and then a local variable is created, the local variable will contain the name of the front control or indicator placed on the front panel. For example, if the user has a control labeled Set Point and then creates a local variable, the node would appear as Set Point.
  • the user can select the appropriate variable by either clicking on it using the Operating tool, or popping up on it and choosing the variable from the Select Item menu, as shown in FIG. 118.
  • the user can also determine whether he wants to read or write to the control by selecting either the Change To Read Local or the Change to Write Local option. If the user wants to read what is currently stored in the local variable, it should be read local, and if the user wants to write a new value to the local variable, it should be a write local.
  • FIG. 120 illustrates local variables referred to as month, year, age and day as well as the Select Item menu for these variables.
  • FIG. 121 illustrates how the user can have multiple local variables accessing the same control, with each having a different sense, i.e., either reading or writing to a control. It is noted that the user must be careful to sequence the access to local variables or global variables so that the desired results are obtained, as in the example above. For example, there is no guarantee that the "Write" to age will occur before the "Read” from age if the user does not create the proper sequencing.
  • step 602 the block diagram editor displays the local variable icon in the block diagram.
  • step 606 the block diagram editor assigns memory in the random access memory (RAM) to the local variable.
  • RAM random access memory
  • step 608 the block diagram editor creates a code routine to either read to or write to the local variable, depending upon the user's selection of "change to read local” or “change to write local.” In other words, this code routine transfers data between the local variable memory and the control memory. It is noted that this code routine can only be used by nodes contained in the VI where the local variable resides.
  • step 606 when memory is assigned to the local variable in step 606 (FIG. 122) storage is associated with each control on the panel that is appropriate for its data type. For example, an integer will have 1, 2, or 4 bytes, a floating point number 4, 8, 10, 12, or maybe 16. Other types such as strings are variable in length; so the memory allocated to them must be variable. Storage for a string is referred to as a handle, meaning a pointer to a pointer to a moveable sizeable block of memory. Strings and arrays, for example, an arrays of numerics, are stored as handles.
  • the memory associated with the control When updating the value of a control or indicator through a local or global, the memory associated with the control must be updated.
  • this is accomplished by machine code generated by the local variable to move the memory from the data signal on the block diagram to the control on the front panel for a write to the local, or from the control to the data signal for a read of the local.
  • the code is generated in a generic way depending on the control's data type and is specific to each data type. For example, to write a numeric such as an integer to a control associated with a local variable, the code associated with the local variable simply moves the appropriate number of bytes for the data type.
  • a call to a function to get the size of the source string a call to a function to set the size of the destination string, and then a call to a third function to move the string from the source to the destination.
  • a VI includes a front panel having two waveform charts, as shown.
  • a block diagram having two While loops is used where each includes a random number generator connected to a respective chart to generate a waveform on the respective chart.
  • the front panel for the VI is illustrated in FIG. 124.
  • FIG. 125 a first incorrect method to accomplish the desired result is shown.
  • the switch terminal is placed outside of both loops and is wired to each conditional terminal, as shown.
  • the switch is read only once before either While Loop begins executing. If a true value is passed into the loops, the While Loops run indefinitely. Turning off the switch does not stop the VI because the switch is not read each time through the loop. Because the switch is read only one time, this solution does not work.
  • Loop 1 a second incorrect method is shown.
  • the switch terminal is moved inside Loop 1 so that it is read at each iteration of the loop.
  • Loop I terminates properly, there is a problem with this approach also.
  • Loop 2 does not execute until it receives all its inputs, and Loop 1 does not pass out the value of the switch until it terminates.
  • Loop 2 executes only after Loop I finishes, and these loops do not execute in parallel.
  • FIG. 127 a correct method whereby one switch is used to control two While Loops using local variables according to the present invention is shown.
  • another terminal is created that can be used to access a single control from multiple locations.
  • This separate terminal is called a local variable.
  • the On/Off Switch terminal is placed inside Loop 1 and a local variable instance of that switch is placed inside Loop 2.
  • Loop 1 a local variable instance of that switch is placed inside Loop 2.
  • local variables can be used to read a user's inputs from controls and output results to an indicator.
  • Local variables can be used to write those values into a control, as well as allow the user to update a control from the block diagram.
  • the user can have any number of local variable references for a given front panel control, with some in write mode and others in read mode.
  • the user can use a front panel control both as an input and an output to create a control/indicator object.
  • the front panel in FIG. 128 includes a single string indicator, i.e., an indicator which displays a single string.
  • the block diagram includes two while loops.
  • the user wants to update the string in the front panel to display which loop is currently executing. Without a local or global variable, there is no way to accomplish this.
  • the user can place the indicator terminal in either one loop or the other.
  • Using a local variable the user can create two instances of the same front panel indicator, so that a single indicator displays the current location of execution.
  • the Which Loop? indicator is placed in Loop One and a local variable instance or copy of that indicator is placed in Loop Two.
  • "Loop 1" and "Loop 2" strings are connected to the respective Which Loop? local variables and display the respective loop executing.
  • FIG. 128 shows that an indicator can be updated in two separate locations in the diagram.
  • the user may also want to pass data between two different locations on the diagram, and the local variable according to the present invention can be used to accomplish this as well.
  • FIGS. 129-132 an example of a VI that uses a local variable to update a string indicator and graph in multiple places on a block diagram is shown.
  • the user first creates a panel of a VI as shown in FIG. 129.
  • this VI referred to as the Waveform Monitor VI
  • this VI includes a waveform graph indicator and a Current Process string indicator.
  • the block diagram In order to construct the block diagram illustrated in FIGS. 130-132 the user switches to edit mode by clicking on the Mode button.
  • the block diagram comprises a sequence structure having three frames referred to as 0, 1, and 2.
  • Frame 0 acquires and graphs a sine wave
  • frame I acquires and graphs a square pattern
  • frame 2 acquires and graphs a sawtooth pattern.
  • the block diagram employs the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (FIG. 152A) from the Dialog and Date/Time menu. As previously noted, this function allows a user to set the time period in which a diagram executes. In FIG. 130 this function is configured receiving an input of 5000, meaning that this sequence frame will not complete until 5000 ms or 5 seconds has elapsed.
  • the Acquire Waveform VI illustrated in FIGS. 130-132 returns a specified waveform depending on the constant value passed to it.
  • Current Process and Waveform are local variables that update indicators at multiple locations in the block diagram. The Waveform local displays the waveform currently being generated. The Current Process local variable displays a message indicating to the user which waveform is being graphed. The steps for creating the local variables are described below.
  • the user first selects the Local Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and then chooses the variable name by clicking on the local with the Operating tool. To make additional locals, the user simply copies the variable and pastes it to a different location, making sure that all of these local variables are write locals. To do this, the user pops up on the local and selects Change to Write Local. If this option is not available, the local is currently in the correct state.
  • FIGS. 130-132 uses two local variables.
  • One local variable updates the graph in each sequence, i.e. in each frame of the sequence structure, while the other updates the string indicator with the current status of the VI.
  • the VI When the VI is run, the same graph displays each waveform generated in each of the sequence structure frames. Similarly, one string indicator immediately displays what is taking place in each sequence.
  • the VI illustrated in FIGS. 129-132 is referred to in the following discussion as Waveform Monitor.vi.
  • FIGS. 133-136 a VI example which illustrates how a local variable is used to both read and write to a front panel control is shown.
  • the user first creates a front panel as shown in FIG. 133.
  • the front panel of this VI referred to as the Select and Generate Waveform VI is included as a VI in LabVIEW®.
  • the front panel includes a menu ring referred to as Waveform Type, an oblong button referred to as Generate Waveform, a Stop button, and a waveform graph referred to as Test Results.
  • the user first switches to edit mode by clicking on the Mode button.
  • the block diagram includes a sequence structure having three frames 0, 1, and 2.
  • Frame 0 is illustrated in FIG. 134 and frames 1 and 2 are illustrated in FIGS. 135 and 136, respectively.
  • the sequence structure is comprised within a conditional structure which in turn is comprised in a while loop.
  • the True case of the conditional structure is shown in FIG. 134, and it is noted that the False case is empty.
  • the Wait function from the Dialog & Date/Time menu is used in frame 1 of the sequence structure to generate a three-second delay before the graph and ring control are reset to default values which occur in frame 2.
  • the Acquire Waveform VI is used in frames 0 and 2 of the sequence structure to generate a waveform to be displayed on the graph.
  • Local variables referred to as Test Results and Waveform Type are used to reset the ring control and the waveform graph in frame 2 after the waveform has been plotted.
  • the Not function from the Arithmetic menu and illustrated in FIG. 152B inverts the value of the Stop button in the while loop; thus, the while loop executes repeatedly until the user clicks on the Stop button.
  • the Numeric Constant from the Structs & Constants menu which appears as a 0 enclosed by a rectangle in FIG. 136, is used to pass a 0 value into the Waveform Type local variable and the Acquire Waveform subVI in frame 2 to clear the menu ring and graph.
  • the steps for creating the local variables are discussed below.
  • the user first selects the Local Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and chooses the variable name by clicking on the local variable with the Operating tool. To make additional locals, the user simply copies the variable and pastes it to a different location. It is important to make sure that all local variables are write locals. To accomplish this, the user pops up on the local and selects Change to Write Local. If this option is not available, the local is currently in the correct state.
  • the user selects the waveform to generate and presses the waveform generation button. It is noted that during execution in frame 2 of the Sequence structure, the VI sets the menu ring to the first option by writing a 0 to the local. Additionally, the VI clears the Test Results graph in frame 2 by using the Acquire Wavetoa-m subVI to output an array of zeros, and writing the array to the Test Results local variable.
  • FIGS. 137 and 138 a VI that generates two different random numbers and displays them on two waveform charts is shown.
  • the front panel of the VI has a single on/off switch and two waveform charts referred to as Chart 1 and chart 2.
  • Chart 1 and chart 2 the block diagram includes two While Loops.
  • the Random Number (0-1) function (Arithmetic menu) is used to generate the data that is provided to the local variables Chart I and Chart 2.
  • the On/off switch stops the execution of both loops.
  • a local variable instance of the On/Off Switch is used to stop one of the While Loops. It is noted that the local variable must be a read local.
  • FIGS. 139, 140, and 140A-C a VI that continuously generates random numbers and displays them inside digital indicators until the stop button is pressed is shown.
  • the front panel includes a slide control referred to as Selector which includes Stand By, Number One, Number Two, and Numbers One and Two selections.
  • FIG. 140 the block diagram includes a While loop which includes a conditional structure having four frames 0-3.
  • Frame 0 (FIG. 140A) is empty
  • frame 1 (FIG. 140B) includes a random number generator connected to the Number One local variable
  • frame 2 includes a random number generator connected to the Number Two local variable
  • frame 3 (FIG. 140) includes two random number generators connected to Number and Number Two, respectively.
  • the Number One and Number Two indicators generate either Number One, Number Two, or both Number One and Number Two random numbers depending on the selection of the slide control. If the slide control is in the Stand By position, the VI does not generate any numbers.
  • the block diagram of the VI has been modified so that the slide is initialized to Stand By before the numbers are generated.
  • the block diagram uses a sequence structure having frame 0 which includes a local variable to initialize the selector. The value is wired to the edge of the loop to ensure that the initialization happens before the loop begins.
  • a global variable corresponds to a control on a global variable panel, i.e., global variables are implemented simply as a control and are not associated with a shift register or loop function.
  • the block diagram editor sets aside memory location storage for that control's data type.
  • the global variable is a built-in object.
  • the user defines a global variable by creating a special kind of global variable panel with controls that define the data type of the global variable. For example, if the user needs to pass a number between two VIs running concurrently, a global variable panel that contains a single numeric control is created. This global variable panel does not have a block diagram associated with it.
  • the numeric control on the global variable front panel is a common storage place for the number passed between the two VIs. If the user needs to pass a Boolean value and a number between two VIs, there are two methods in which to pass multiple values between VIs.
  • the user can create two global variable VIs, one with a Boolean control and one with a numeric control. In an alternate method, the user creates one global VI that contains both a Boolean and a numeric control.
  • the second approach, using multiple variables in one global VI, is more efficient and it can be used to group related variables together.
  • FIG. 142 a global variable is created by selecting the Global Variable option from the Structs and Constants menu.
  • the Structs and Constants menu is shown in FIG. 143.
  • a node (FIG. 144) for the global appears on the diagram. Initially, the node contains "?" because the user has not yet defined its type.
  • the user first opens the global variable panel by double clicking on the node and then defines the data type for each of the global variables on the panel by placing controls on this panel the same way they are placed on a standard VI front panel. Each control must be labeled with an owned label for reference to each variable by its name.
  • FIG. 145 illustrates three globals--a number, a string, and a cluster containing two values. The user also can optionally create an icon for the global variable panel.
  • the user After the user defines a panel and optional icon for the global variable panel and saves the global panel, he returns to the block diagram of the original VI. Because the global variable panel can define multiple variables on its front panel, the user must select the specific global variable desired to be accessed. Referring now to FIG. 146, to select a specific global variable, the user pops up on the node and selects the item from the Select Item menu. The node then displays the name of the global variable selected. (The name used is in the control's owned label).
  • the user simply clicks on the node and chooses the global variable he wants to access as shown in FIG. 147.
  • the node changes to display the variable chosen.
  • the user may want to use this set of global variables in other VIs.
  • a global variable is simply a special kind of VI and thus is placed in other VIs using the VI . . . option of the Functions menu.
  • the user can then pop up on the node to select the specific global variable desired to be accessed. After placing the global variable on the diagram, the user will either write data to it or read data from it. If the user wants to write a new value into the global variable, the user must make it a write variable.
  • the user in creating a global variable, the user first places an icon for the global variable in the block diagram, and then creates a control on a global variable panel for that global. This assigns a data type to the global and reserves memory storage for that global. The user assigns a name to the control which thereby assigns a name to the global variable.
  • Multiple global variables can be created in two ways. First, the user can create several VIs, each with one item or one global variable, second, the user can create one multiple global VI by defining multiple data types on the one global variable panel. The multiple global VI approach is more efficient, and allows the user to group related variables together.
  • global variables are implemented in a manner similar to local variables whereby they correspond to controls on the front panel of a functional VI.
  • a global variable occurrence in a first VI can directly affect front panel controls on a second VI.
  • a global variable corresponds to a control on a special global variable panel not associated with a functional VI.
  • a global variable occurrence in a first VI cannot directly affect a front panel control in a second VI, but rather can only affect the control on the special global variable panel.
  • the second VI would be required to read the value of this global variable control to affect controls on the second front panel.
  • step 612 when the user pops up a global variable on a screen, the block diagram editor displays its global variable icon in the block diagram. Once the user has dropped a global variable icon in the block diagram, the block diagram editor associates the global variable icon with a control in the global variable panel in response to the user's selecting a control in the panel. As previously noted, this panel is a special global variable panel not associated with a functional VI.
  • step 616 the block diagram editor assigns a memory location to the global variable.
  • step 618 the block diagram editor creates a code routine to read and write to the global variable.
  • steps 612-618 are similar to steps 602-608 except that the code created in step 618 allows other VIs access to this memory location, whereas the code created for a local variable in step 608 only allows access to the memory location by a node within the respective VI where the local variable resides. Also, a local variable is associated with an existing control in a functional VI, whereas when a global variable is created, the user places a control in a global variable panel.
  • One example of how the global variable of the present invention might be used in a data program is where two while loops in different VIs are running independently and in parallel, perhaps at different rates, and it is desirable that they communicate data between each other. For instance, if one while loop is measuring a temperature and the other while loop is performing analysis using that temperature, the only way to transfer data between those two while loops is through a global variable, since data cannot leave the while loop until the while loop has finished execution. A local variable cannot be used since the two loops are in different VIs.
  • FIG. 150 illustrates two VIs running simultaneously where each VI writes a random number to a waveform chart.
  • the first VI also contains a Boolean to terminate both VIs. It is noted that when both loops are on a single diagram, i.e., in a single VI, a local variable can be used to terminate the loops. Where each loop is in a separate VI, a global variable must be used to terminate the loops.
  • a value should be written to a global variable or the global variable initializes to a default value before the global variable can be read. If the user attempts to read a value from a global variable before he writes to it, the output is the default value for that data type. Second, the user may write to the global variable at a location separate from where he reads from it--in different locations of the block diagram or structure, in different structures or VIs.
  • FIGS. 151-154 an example of a VI that writes to a global variable is shown.
  • a VI Before a global variable can be created, a VI must exist. The first step in creating a VI is opening a front panel. Because the VI in this example is used only to generate numbers, there is no need for front panel objects in the front panel (not shown).
  • FIG. 151 illustrated a global variable panel
  • FIG. 154 illustrates a block diagram using the global variable.
  • the global variable panel in FIG. 151 includes a global Number to Pass variable and a global Boolean Stop Button variable to pass values between two VIs running concurrently. In the block diagram shown in FIG.
  • the user pops up and selects the Global Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and then double-clicks on the global node to bring up the global front panel.
  • the user then creates the global variable panel as shown in FIG. 151. It is noted that the user must label controls with owned labels. It is also noted that there is no block diagram associated with this global panel VI. This global variable panel is referred to as My Globals.vi in the following description.
  • the block diagram includes a While loop wherein the Stop button global is connected through a Not function (FIG. 152B) to the while icon.
  • the Not function (FIG. 152B) (Arithmetic menu) inverts the value of the Stop Button global, and thus the While Loop executes repeatedly until it reads a TRUE.
  • the Numbers to Pass is connected to the iteration icon of the While loop, as shown.
  • the While loop also uses the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (FIG. 152A) (Dialog and Date/Time menu) which dictates that each loop iteration occurs every second
  • the block diagram also includes a sequence structure having only one frame, frame 0.
  • the sequence structure includes the Stop Button global which is initialized with a False value.
  • the False constant is also wired to the loop border of the While loop to force the initialization of the global to occur before the loop begins executing, i.e., to place an artificial data dependency on the two VIs. This prevents the While Loop from reading an uninitialized global variable (that is, one that has an unknown value).
  • the user first places a sequence structure and indefinite loop (while loop) structure on the diagram as shown.
  • the Operating tool clicks on the global variable node and selects the Stop Button as shown in FIG. 153.
  • the global variable now displays the name of the global that he wants to access.
  • the user then makes three copies of the Stop Button global.
  • the user changes one of the globals to the Number to Pass global by clicking on it with the Operating tool and selecting Number to Pass.
  • These three globals are placed in the block diagram as shown.
  • the globals are write globals. That is, the user writes to the global instead of reading from it, as is the case with the Stop Button global in the Sequence structure and the Number to Pass global variable.
  • Stop Button global If the user wants to read from a global, as is in the case with the Stop Button global inside the While Loop, he must change it to a read global. To do so, the user pops up on the global and selects Change to Read Global. The user then initializes the Stop Button global variable inside the Sequence structure by writing a FALSE to it and wires the constant to the loop border as previously discussed. This VI is referred to in the following description as Generate Numbers.vi.
  • FIGS. 155-156 a VI that reads from a global variable created in the previous example is shown.
  • This VI displays the values generated in Generate Numbers on a waveform chart.
  • the user first creates the front panel illustrated in FIG. 155.
  • this VI front panel includes a waveform chart referred to as iterations, a vertical slide referred to as Time Delay, and a Stop button.
  • This front panel is also available as the Display Numbe,'s VI in the preferred embodiment of the invention marketed under the trademark LabVIEW 3.
  • the user then switches to edit mode to create the block diagram (FIG. 156) by clicking on the Mode button.
  • the user employs the VI . . . option from the Functions menu to load My Globals.vi.
  • the node displayed will be either Stop Button or Number to Pass, depending on the order in which they are added to My Globals.vi.
  • the user then copies the global variable so that he has two instances--one Stop Button global and one Number to Pass global.
  • the user changes the Number to Pass global variable to read global by popping up on the node and choosing Change to Read Global from the pop-up menu.
  • the block diagram shown in FIG. 156 employs the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (Dialog and Date/Time menu) to dictate how fast each loop iteration occurs.
  • the Time Delay control icon and a constant (1000) are connected to a multiply node which in turn provides its output to the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function.
  • the Multiply function (Arithmetic menu) converts seconds to milliseconds.
  • a False value is connected to a Not function which is connected to the While loop icon.
  • the Stop button global is also connected to the Not function.
  • the Not function (Arithmetic menu) inverts the value of the Stop Button and causes the While Loop to execute repeatedly until the user clicks on the button, and
  • the Stop Button and Number to Pass globals are used to pass values between two concurrently running VIs.
  • the VI reads a value from the Number to Pass global variable and passes the value to the waveform chart.
  • the VI also writes the current value of the Stop button to the Stop Button global variable each time through the loop. This Boolean value is read in the Generate Numbers VI to control its While Loop as well. The user then saves the VI, which is referred to as Display Numbers.vi.
  • the waveform chart on the Display Numbers front panel displays the data.
  • the Generate Numbers VI continually writes the value of i to the Number to Pass global variable, and the Display Numbers VI is reading that global variable and updating the chart.
  • the Time Delay value determines how often the global variable is read. It is noted that Time Delay has an effect on the values plotted on the waveform chart. If the Time Delay is set to 0, the same i value is read from the global variable several times. If the Time Delay is set to a value greater than 1, the Display Numbers VI may never read some values generated in the Generate Numbers VI. If Time Delay is set to approximately 1, each value generated is read once and only once in Display Number.
  • values may be read more than once, or may not be read at all. If every single update must be processed, the user must take special care to ensure that a new value is not written to a global variable until the previous one has been read, and that after a global has been read, it is not read again until another value has been written to the global.
  • both the Display Numbers and Generate Numbers VIs stop.
  • the VI continually writes the value of the STOP button to the Stop Button global variable. That value is then read in the Generate Numbers VI and passed to the conditional terminal to control its loop as well.
  • a TRUE passes through the global variable to Generate Numbers, where that TRUE value is read to stop that VI as well.
  • FIGS. 157 and 158 the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses both global and local variables is shown.
  • This VI uses artificial data dependency to control the execution order.
  • the front panel includes a waveform chart, a Stop button and Left and Right Loop Counters.
  • the block diagram (FIG. 158) includes two While loops as shown as well as a sequence structure having frame 0.
  • a local variable referred to as Chart is included in each of the While loops, as shown.
  • a random number generator is connected to the Chart local variable in the left While loop, as shown.
  • the Chart local variable is also included in the right While loop and is connected to a Fractional icon, as shown.
  • the output of the Fractional icon is provided to a Concatenate strings icon.
  • Concatenate String icon Other inputs to the Concatenate String icon are a Get Date/Time String icon, a tab icon, and a carriage return icon.
  • the output of the Concatenate Strings icon is provided to a Write File icon which writes the string to a file.
  • Each of the While loops and the sequence structure uses the Stop Global global variable to terminate execution, as shown.
  • the VI begins by opening a new file and writing a FALSE value to a Stop Global global variable, as shown at the top of the block diagram.
  • a FALSE is written to the global to prevent the right While Loop from reading an uninitialized value in the event that it executes before the left While Loop.
  • the left While Loop updates the waveform chart using the Random Number Generator.
  • the right While Loop reads the Local Variable Random Number every two seconds, converts the number to a string, and writes it to the file.
  • the VI also writes the current time to the file.
  • the file is closed.
  • the wire connection between the right While loop and the close File icon means that the Close File icon can only execute after the right While loop completes.
  • local variables are used to access front panel objects at various locations in a block diagram and are accessible only in that single VI. If a value needs to be passed between multiple VIs in an application, a global variable according to the present invention can be used. Thus a global variable is similar to a local variable except that it can pass values between multiple VIs.
  • a local variable is peculiar to the panel corresponding to the VI where the local is created, whereas a global variable is global to all VIs. Further, a global is not created in a functional VI, but rather is created in its own global variable panel not associated with a VI whose only purpose is to facilitate the implementation of a global variable.
  • the data storage of a local variable is one of the controls on a VI's front panel.
  • the global variable and local variables in the preferred embodiment offer only an atomic read and atomic write for their access types.
  • the atomic read and atomic write are necessary to ensure that, for instance, simultaneous reads and writes on the same variable don't occur. It would be undesirable for a block diagram to read values that were only halfway written.
  • an atomic write and atomic read method is implemented so that if a write is in progress, the read is suspended and doesn't take place until the writer has completed.
  • an incremental write feature is implemented in which the value is atomically incremented or decremented. An example of this would be: make the global three more than it currently is, or five less than it currently is.
  • another access mode referred to as a clearing read is included.
  • test and set feature is included in which the user can use a global variable to ensure that only one piece of diagram code is referencing another access type. Test and set could be used to implement semaphores or mutual exclusion code.
  • the present invention enqueues and dequeues values so that a global variable is actually a series of first in, first out type of an array of values. Also, a wait for change feature which includes an occurrence or other indication that the global had changed so that globals do not need to be polled as often.
  • an alternate embodiment of the invention is able to log a sequence of global values and time of change to a file or to another place in memory. This is useful as a debugging log to see when conditions occur where multiple diagrams write to a global, which went first, and which is denied access to the global.
  • global and local variables can be employed to access a given set of values throughout the present invention.
  • Global variables pass data out of a subVI before it has finished executing or pass values between two VIs running concurrently.
  • Global variables store their data in a control in a special global variable panel for that global variable.
  • Local variables serve a similar purpose within a single VI, storing data in items on the front panel of the VI in which the user paces that local variable.
  • a user should write a value to a global variable before reading from it.
  • When a user writes to a local variable he updates its corresponding front panel object.
  • the user reads from a local variable he reads the current value of its corresponding front panel object. The user can view changes to global and local variables on the respective panels, thus considerably easing debugging.

Abstract

Global and local variable implementations in a graphical data flow programming environment whereby the local and global variables correspond to a control on a panel. A global variable is created by placing a global variable icon in a block diagram and creating an associated control in a global variable panel. The user the defines the data type of the global variable and assigns a name to the global variable. Therefore, global variables have a greatly reduced storage and execution overhead as compared with prior designs. Since a global variable is associated with a control in a panel, the user can view the global variable updating on the panel during execution of a VI. This greatly facilitates debugging. A local variable capability is also provided which enables a user to more effectively create block diagram programs and model processes in a graphical programming environment. A local variable is associated with a control on the front panel of a VI. A local variable is peculiar to the panel corresponding to the VI where the local is created, whereas a global variable is global to all VIs. Further, a local variable is created in a functional VI, whereas a global variable is not created in a functional VI. The data storage of a local variable is one of the controls on a VI's front panel. Writing to a local variable has the same result as passing data to the control terminal, except that the user can write to it even though it is a control. Also, the user can have any number of local variable references to a given front panel control, with some in write mode, and others in read mode. A local variable reference thus allows the user to use a front panel control as both an input and an output. One benefit of this local variable capability is that a user is allowed to use local variables in respective subVIs, i.e. subroutines, which are not affected by other VIs or other block diagrams.

Description

This is a continuation-in-part of application Ser. No. 07/979,416 filed Nov. 19, 1992 now U.S. Pat. No. 5,291,587, for "Graphical System for Executing a Process and for Programming a Computer to Execute a Process, Including Graphical Variable Inputs and Variable Outputs" and assigned to National Instruments, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 07/376,257 filed Jul. 6, 1989, now abandoned, which was a continuation of Ser. No. 06/851,569 filed Apr. 14, 1986, which is now U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221.
RESERVATION OF COPYRIGHT
A portion of the disclosure of this patent document contains material to which a claim of copyright protection is made. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document or the patent disclosure as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Office patent file or records, but reserves all other rights whatsoever.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to graphical systems for creating and executing data flow programs, and more specifically to method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow programming environment
2. Description of the Related Art
A computer system can be envisioned as having a number of levels of complexity. Referring now to FIG. 1, the lowest level of a computer system may be referred to as the digital logic level. The digital logic level comprises the computer's true hardware, primarily consisting of gates which are integrated together to form various integrated circuits. Other hardware devices include printed circuit boards, the power supply, memory, and the various input/output devices, among others. Gates are digital elements having one or more digital inputs, signals representing 0 or 1 states, and which compute an output based on these inputs according to a simple function. Common examples of gates are AND gates, OR gates, etc. It is also noted that there is yet another level below level 0 which can be referred to as the device level. This level deals with the individual transistors and semiconductor physics necessary to construct the gates comprising the digital logic level.
The next level, referred to as level 1, is referred to as the microprogramming level. The microprogramming level is essentially a hybrid between computer hardware and software. The microprogramming level is typically implemented by software instructions stored in ROM (read only memory), these instructions being referred to as microcode. The microprogramming level can be thought of as including various interpreters comprised of sequences of microcode which carry out instructions available at the machine language level, which is at level 2. For example, when an instruction such as an arithmetic or shift function appears at the machine language level, this instruction is carried out one step at a time by an interpreter at the microprogramming level. Because the architecture of the microprogramming level is defined by hardware, it is a very difficult level in which to program. Timing considerations are frequently very important in programming at this level and thus usually only very skilled, experienced microprogrammers operate at this level.
As mentioned above, the level above the microprogramming level is referred to as the machine language level. The machine language level comprises the 1's and 0's that a program uses to execute instructions and manipulate data. The next level above the machine language level is referred to as the assembly language level. This level includes the instruction set of the computer system, i.e. the various op codes, instruction formats, etc. that cause the computer to execute instructions. In assembly language each instruction produces exactly one machine language instruction. Thus, there is a one to one correspondence between assembly language instructions and machine language instructions. The primary difference is that assembly language uses very symbolic human-readable names and addresses instead of binary ones to allow easier programming. For example, where a machine language instruction might include the sequence "101101," the assembly language equivalent might be "ADD." Therefore, assembly language is typically the lowest level language used by programmers, and assembly language programming requires a skilled and experienced programmer.
The next level includes high level text-based programming languages which are typically used by programmers in writing applications programs. Many different high level programming languages exist, including BASIC, C, FORTRAN, Pascal, COBOL, ADA, APL, etc. Programs written in these high level languages are translated to the machine language level by translators known as compilers. The high level programming languages in this level, as well as the assembly language level, are referred to in this disclosure as text-based programming environments.
Increasingly computers are required to be used and programmed by those who are not highly trained in computer programming techniques. When traditional text-based programming environments are used, the user's programming skills and ability to interact with the computer system often become a limiting factor in the achievement of optimal utilization of the computer system.
There are numerous subtle complexities which a user must master before he can efficiently program a computer system in a text-based environment. For example, text-based programming environments have traditionally used a number of programs to accomplish a given task. Each program in turn often comprises one or more subroutines. Software systems typically coordinate activity between multiple programs, and each program typically coordinates activity between multiple subroutines. However, in a text-based environment, techniques for coordinating multiple programs generally differ from techniques for coordinating multiple subroutines. Furthermore, since programs ordinarily can stand alone while subroutines usually cannot in a text-based environment, techniques for linking programs to a software system generally differ from techniques for linking subroutines to a program. Complexities such as these often make it difficult for a user who is not a specialist in computer programming to efficiently program a computer system in a text-based environment.
The task of programming a computer system to model a process often is further complicated by the fact that a sequence of mathematical formulas, mathematical steps or other procedures customarily used to conceptually model a process often does not closely correspond to the traditional text-based programming techniques used to program a computer system to model such a process. For example, a computer programmer typically develops a conceptual model for a physical system which can be partitioned into functional blocks, each of which corresponds to actual systems or subsystems. Computer systems, however, ordinarily do not actually compute in accordance with such conceptualized functional blocks. Instead, they often utilize calls to various subroutines and the retrieval of data from different memory storage locations to implement a procedure which could be conceptualized by a user in terms of a functional block. In other words, the requirement that a user program in a text-based programming environment places a level of abstraction between the user's conceptualization of the solution and the implementation of a method that accomplishes this solution in a computer program. Thus, a user often must substantially master different skills in order to both conceptually model a system and then to program a computer to model that system. Since a user often is not fully proficient in techniques for programming a computer system in a text-based environment to implement his model, the efficiency with which the computer system can be utilized to perform such modeling often is reduced.
One particular field in which computer systems are employed to model physical systems is the field of instrumentation. An instrument is a device which collects information from an environment and displays this information to a user. Examples of various types of instruments include oscilloscopes, digital multimeters, pressure sensors, etc. Types of information which might be collected by respective instruments include: voltage, resistance, distance, velocity, pressure, frequency of oscillation, humidity or temperature, among others. An instrumentation system ordinarily controls its constituent instruments from which it acquires data which it analyzes, stores and presents to a user of the system. Computer control of instrumentation has become increasingly desirable in view of the increasing complexity and variety of instruments available for use.
In the past, many instrumentation systems comprised individual instruments physically interconnected. Each instrument typically included a physical front panel with its own peculiar combination of indicators, knobs, or switches. A user generally had to understand and manipulate individual controls for each instrument and record readings from an array of indicators. Acquisition and analysis of data in such instrumentation systems was tedious and error prone. An incremental improvement in the manner in which a user interfaced with various instruments was made with the introduction of centralized control panels. In these improved systems, individual instruments were wired to a control panel, and the individual knobs, indicators or switches of each front panel were either preset or were selected to be presented on a common front panel.
A significant advance occurred with the introduction of computers to provide more flexible means for interfacing instruments with a user. In such computerized instrumentation systems the user interacted with a software program executing on the computer system through the video monitor rather than through a manually operated front panel. These earlier improved instrumentation systems provided significant performance efficiencies over earlier systems for linking and controlling test instruments.
However, these improved instrumentation systems had significant drawbacks. For example, due to the wide variety of possible testing situations and environments, and also the wide array of instruments available, it was often necessary for a user to develop a program to control the new instrumentation system desired. As discussed above, computer programs used to control such improved instrumentation systems had to be written in conventional text-based programming languages such as, for example, assembly language, C, FORTRAN, BASIC, or Pascal. Traditional users of instrumentation systems, however, often were not highly trained in programming techniques and, in addition, traditional text-based programming languages were not sufficiently intuitive to allow users to use these languages without training. Therefore, implementation of such systems frequently required the involvement of a programmer to write software for control and analysis of instrumentation data. Thus, development and maintenance of the software elements in these instrumentation systems often proved to be difficult.
U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221 to Kodosky et al discloses a graphical system and method for modeling a process, i.e. a graphical programming environment which enables a user to easily and intuitively model a process. The graphical programming environment disclosed in Kodosky et al can be considered the highest and most intuitive way in which to interact with a computer. Referring now to FIG. 1A, a graphically based programming environment can be represented at level 5 above text-based high level programming languages such as C, Pascal, etc. The method disclosed in Kodosky et al allows a user to construct a diagram using a block diagram editor such that the diagram created graphically displays a procedure or method for accomplishing a certain result, such as manipulating one or more input variables to produce one or more output variables. As the user constructs the data flow diagram using the block diagram editor, machine language instructions are automatically constructed which characterize an execution procedure which corresponds to the displayed procedure. Therefore, a user can create a text-based computer program solely by using a graphically based programming environment. This graphically based programming environment may be used for creating virtual instrumentation systems and modeling processes as well as for any type of general programming.
In the method described in Kodosky et al, no methodology was provided to allow a user to implement a local variable that can only be accessed by a particular diagram or VI and which cannot be affected by VIs not in that diagram. However, it would be highly desirable to have a local variable capability in a graphical programming environment for several reasons. First of all, as is well known to programmers in traditional text-based programming environments, local variables enable a user to ensure that the variable used in a particular subroutine or module will not be affected by the same variable used in other subroutines in other modules. This provides a safer and cleaner programming interface. For example, in a large program where only global variables are allowed, the user may not be able to keep track of the order in which that global variable is updated, and different modules may affect the global variable in undesirable ways. However, with a local variable which is local to a particular subroutine, the user can guarantee that only that subroutine will use that local variable and hence the variable will not be affected by calls or operations in other subroutines.
In addition, the system and method described in Kodosky et al included only one icon on a block diagram where a user could change or read a value in a control. In other words, no two controls could occupy the same storage location, i.e., a user could not create a control representing a storage location and then place subsequent copies of that icon in other places in the block diagram. Since multiple locations could not be created, there was no problem with these locations being updated in an undetermined order. However, this limited program flexibility and was hence undesirable because a user could only update the input to a control at one place in a block diagram, i.e., the input to a control could not be updated in multiple places concurrently in a block diagram. For example, if a program had two loops running and it was desired to stop them with only one button, in the method described in Kodosky et al this could only be accomplished using a global variable hooked to the button with both loops reading from the global. The use of a global variable in this situation is undesirable due to the problems mentioned above.
Also, controls and indicators which could be created by a user in Kodosky et al. could be either read from or written to by a user, but not both. Input terminals associated with controls were read only and output terminals associated with indicators were write only. Thus, a control was either read only or write only, but not both. One advantage of using read only input terminals and write only output terminals was that race conditions could not occur, i.e. race conditions cannot occur in a data flow program between a read only control and a write only indicator. However, providing only read only or only write only controls greatly limits the flexibility of the program. It would be highly desirable to allow a user to read from or write to any control or indicator at any point in a diagram at any time.
Therefore, a method and apparatus is desired which provides a local variable capability for controls and indicators to allow a user to read and write the memory associated with controls and indicators in multiple places in a block diagram.
In the system and method described in Kodosky et al., an iterative loop function and an indefinite loop function were included to allow a user to perform iterations on data. These loop functions included shift registers which provided these loops with the capability of storing data from one iteration to the next in order for them to operate on previous data or to enable them to remember what had occurred in a previous iteration. Shift registers for storage of values could be initialized upon entering a loop, i.e., assigned values upon entering the loop, and then could be updated subsequently during execution of the loop. The loop could change these variables a multitude of times depending on the desired result. Also, the shift registers could be left uninitialized, i.e., not assigned values when the loop was entered. The use of shift registers in loops can be best illustrated by the Fibonacci number problem which is described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221. In the case where the shift registers are not initialized, the values in the shift registers on entering the loop are the same as the values written to the shift registers the previous time the loop was executed. In this manner, a shift register that is not initialized on entry in a loop could essentially be used as a global variable because it "remembers" what happened on previous updates.
Therefore, by creating a subVI having a loop wherein the shift register is not initialized upon entering the loop, the shift register essentially behaved as storage for a global variable. By placing this subVI wherever desired, the user essentially could place global variables wherever desired in a VI. This was very common practice in order to use global variables. However, one problem with this method of creating a global variable was the associated storage and execution overhead. This was because a loop structure contained within a subVI had to be created in order to merely update a global variable. The creation of a loop structure and its associated subVI require some amount of code. Also, if a global variable was required to be updated, a function call to a subVI which in turn executed a loop was performed merely to update the global variable. This resulted in a certain amount of execution overhead, i.e., a much greater amount of work than should be necessary to simply update a global variable.
Therefore, a system and method is desired which allows a new form of global variable to be used in a graphical data flow environment with a reduced amount of execution and storage overhead.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention comprises local and global variable capabilities which enable a user to more effectively create block diagram programs and model processes in a graphical data flow programming environment. The local and global variables include associated panel controls which allow a user to read or adjust the values of these variables during program execution.
A global variable is created by placing a global variable icon in a block diagram and creating an associated global variable panel. The global variable panel is not associated with a VI. Therefore, a global variable is not created in a functional VI, but rather is created with its own panel not associated with a VI whose only purpose is to facilitate the implementation of a global variable. The user then defines the data type of the global variable and assigns a name to the global variable. Therefore, global variables are not required to be implemented as shift registers in a loop contained within a sub-V This greatly reduces the storage and execution overhead associated with creating and using global variables. Since a global variable is associated with a panel, the user can view the global variable updating on the panel during execution of a VI. This greatly facilitates debugging. The user can also change the value of the global variable during execution.
A local variable is created in a similar manner to a global variable. However, unlike a global variable a local variable is created in a functional VI. In other words, the data storage of a local variable is provided by one of the controls on a VI's front panel. Writing to a local variable has the same result as passing data to the control terminal, except that the user can write to it even though it is a control. Also, the user can have any number of local variable references to a given front panel control with some in write mode and others in read mode. One distinction between local and global variables is that a local variable is peculiar to the panel corresponding to the VI where the local is created, whereas a global variable is global to all VIs.
A local variable reference allows the user to use a front panel control as both an input and an output. One benefit of this local variable capability is that local variables can be used in their respective VIs and are guaranteed not to be affected by other VIs or other block diagrams. This provides a cleaner programming environment and ensures that a user's local variable will not be affected by undesirable changes in other VIs. A second benefit of the local variable capability of the present invention is that a user can have multiple functions operating concurrently wherein each function can potentially affect the input or output to a control or indicator. Finally, the present invention allows a user to implement a read/write control to more effectively interact with the front panel.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF TIlE DRAWINGS
The purpose and advantages of the present invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the following detailed description in conjunction with the appended drawings in which:
FIG. 1 illustrates various levels of complexity in a computer system according to the prior art;
FIG. 1A illustrates the various levels of complexity of a computer system including a graphical programming environment as the highest level;
FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a system for modeling a process according to the present invention;
FIG. 3 Is an illustrative drawing of a representation of a virtual instrument produced using the system of FIG. 2;
FIG. 4 shows a block diagram of an instrumentation system including the system of FIG. 2;
FIG. 5 is a representative drawing of various choices for an illustrative hardware instrumentation system of the preferred embodiment;
FIG. 5A is an illustrative hardware instrumentation system of the preferred embodiment;
FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the computer system of FIGS. 5 and 5A;
FIG. 7 shows a block diagram representing an exemplary data flow system;
FIG. 8A illustrates a virtual instrument data structure diagram used by the system of FIG. 2 and the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
FIG. 8B shows a legend applicable to the illustration of FIG. 8A;
FIGS. 9A-L are flowchart diagrams illustrating operation of the execution subsystem of FIGS. 2 and 4;
FIG. 10 shows an illustrative front panel produced using the front panel editor of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
FIG. 11 shows an illustrative icon produced using the icon editor of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4;
FIG. 12A shows a graphical representation of a sequence structure;
FIG. 12B shows a graphical representation of an iterative loop structure;
FIG. 12C shows a graphical representation of a conditional structure;
FIG. 12D shows a graphical representation of an indefinite loop structure;
FIG. 12E shows a graphical representation of shift registers on the indefinite loop structure of FIG. 12D;
FIG. 13 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of a sequence structure shown in FIG. 12A;
FIG. 14 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical represention of an iterative loop structure shown in FIG. 12B;
FIG. 15 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of a conditional structure shown in FIG. 12C;
FIG. 16 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical represention of an indefinite loop structure shown in FIG. 12D;
FIG. 17 shows an illustrative block diagram generally corresponding to the graphical representation of an iterative loop structure including a shift register shown on the left in FIG. 12E;
FIG. 18 illustrates a type descriptor used to describe data structures;
FIGS. 19A-K illustrate computer video displays during each successive step in a construction of an exemplary block diagram using the block diagram editor of FIGS. 2 or 4;
FIGS. 20A-C illustrate a system representation corresponding to FIGS. 19A-D;
FIGS. 21A-B illustrate a system representation corresponding to FIGS. 19E and 19H;
FIG. 22 is a drawing representing a block diagram according to the present invention as displayed on a computer video monitor to model the illustrative hardware system of FIG. 5A;
FIG. 23 illustrates serial execution mode of a VI;
FIG. 24 illustrates "wait" icon execution:
FIG. 25 illustrates parallel execution mode for a VI;
FIG. 26 illustrates a ready node list, also referred to as the run queue;
FIG. 27 illustrates how nodes are placed on the run queue as they become ready and are interleaved with other nodes;
FIG. 28 illustrates parallel execution of nodes in a block diagram virtual instrument;
FIGS. 29-37 illustrate various virtual instrument execution states;
FIG. 38 illustrates an execution road map;
FIG. 39 illustrates execution state symbols;
FIGS. 40-41 illustrates virtual instruments in various execution states;
FIG. 42 illustrates an example of the front panel for a temperature VI;
FIG. 43 illustrates the block diagram for the temperature VI in FIG. 42;
FIG. 44 illustrates the icon and connector for the temperature VI in FIGS. 42 and 43;
FIGS. 45 and 46 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses the temperature VI in FIGS. 42-44 as a subVI in its block diagram;
FIG. 47 illustrates a front panel and its associated block diagram;
FIG. 48 illustrates the run mode palette that appears at the top of the window when a VI is in run mode;
FIGS. 49A-D illustrate the run button and its associated icons;
FIGS. 50A-B illustrate the mode button in run mode and edit mode;
FIGS. 51A-B illustrate the icons associated with the continuous run button;
FIGS. 52A-B iilustrate breakpoint button icons;
FIGS. 53A-C illustrate icons associated with the step mode button;
FIGS. 54A-B illustrate execution highlighting button icons;
FIGS. 55A-B illustrate print mode button icons;
FIGS. 56A-C illustrate data logging button icons;
FIG. 57 illustrates the edit mode palette;
FIGS. 58A-B illustrate operating tool icons;
FIGS. 59A-C illustrate positioning tool icons;
FIGS. 60A-C illustrate labeling tool icons;
FIG. 61 illustrates the wiring tool;
FIGS. 62A-B illustrate the coloring tool;
FIG. 63 illustrates the menu bar in its active state;
FIG. 64 illustrates the file menu;
FIG. 65 illustrates the edit menu;
FIG. 66 illustrates the operate menu;
FIG. 67 illustrates the controls menu;
FIG. 68 illustrates the windows menu;
FIG. 69 illustrates the text menu;
FIG. 70 illustrates the menu bar when the diagram window is active;
FIG. 71 illustrates the functions menu;
FIG. 72 illustrates examples of numeric controls and indicators;
FIG. 73 illustrates examples of Boolean controls and indicators;
FIG. 74 illustrates how controls and indicators are configured;
FIG. 75 illustrates the panel window and diagram window of a VI illustrating nodes, terminals, and wires;
FIG. 76 illustrates examples of wire types;
FIGS. 77 and 78 are examples of VIs;
FIG. 79 illustrates icons grouped together into a lower level VI;
FIG. 80 illustrates a VI that adds three numbers together and returns their result;
FIG. 81 illustrates activating the icon editor;
FIG. 82 illustrates the tools that may be used to-create an icon design;
FIG. 83 illustrates the show connector function in the icon pane pop-up menu which may be used to define a connector;
FIG. 84 illustrates a front panel with the connector replacing the icon pane in the upper right corner of the panel window;
FIG. 85 illustrates the various choices for terminal patterns selected using the patterns option from the pop-up menu;
FIG. 86-88 illustrates how a user assigns front panel controls and indicators to the terminals using the wiring tool;
FIG. 89 illustrates the VI option which is used to place a VI as a subVI in the block diagram of another VI;
FIG. 90 illustrates the help window for a subVI icon;
FIG. 91 illustrates a While Loop selected from the Structs and Constants palette of the Functions Menu;
FIG. 92 illustrates a while loop;
FIG. 93 illustrates an example of a while loop;
FIG. 94 illustrates a for loop;
FIG. 95 illustrates an example of a for loop;
FIG. 96 illustrates the grey dot created during numeric conversions;
FIG. 97 illustrates a shift register;
FIG. 98 illustrates the operation of a shift register;
FIG. 99 illustrates a shift register with additional terminals to access values from previous iterations;
FIG. 100 illustrates operation of initialized and uninitialized shift registers;
FIG. 101 illustrates selection of a case structure from the Structs and Constats palette of the Function Menu.
FIG. 102 illustrates a numerical case structure;
FIG. 103 illustrates a Boolean case structure;
FIG. 104 is an example of a Boolean case structure;
FIG. 105 illustrates a sequence structure selected from the Structs and Constants menu palette of the Functions Menu;
FIG. 106 illustrates a sequence structure;
FIG. 107 illustrates an example of a three framed sequence structure using sequence locals;
FIG. 108 illustrates a formula node selected from the structs and constants palette of the functions menu;
FIG. 109 illustrates an equation implemented using arithmetic functions;
FIG. 110 illustrates the same equation implemented using a formula node;
FIG. 111 itlhstrates a waveform chart;
FIG. 112 illustrates the three update modes of a waveform chart, referred to as strip chart, scope chart, and sweep chart;
FIG. 113 illustrates how a scalar output is directly wired to a waveform chart;
FIG. 114 illustrates how a waveform chart accommodates more than one plot using the bundle function;
FIG. 115 illustrates selection of the local variable option from the Structs and Constants menu;
FIG. 116 illustrates the Structs and Constants menu;
FIG. 117 illustrates a local variable node;
FIG. 118 illustrates selection of an appropriate local variable by either choosing the variable from the Select Item menu or clicking on it using the operating tool;
FIG. 119 illustrates the change to read local option;
FIG. 120 illustrates local variables as well as the Select Item menu for these variables;
FIG. 121 illustrates multiple local variables accessing the same control;
FIG. 122 is a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the block diagram editor when a local variable is created;
FIG. 123 illustrates the possible storage options for local variables of various data types;
FIG. 124 illustrates a front panel where one switch is used to control two charts having corresponding while loops;
FIGS. 125-126 are incorrect methods for implementing the front panel of FIG.
FIG. 127 is a method for implementing the front panel of FIG. 124 using local variables according to the preferred embodiment of the invention;
FIG. 128 illustrates a VI which uses local variables to update a string to display the loop currently executing;
FIG. 129 illustrates a VI that uses a local variable to update a string indicator and graph in multiple places on the diagram;
FIGS. 130-132 illustrate the frames of a sequence structure comprising a block diagram corresponding to the front panel of FIG. 129;
FIGS. 133-136 illustrate front panel and block diagram of a VI which uses a local variable to both read and write to a front panel control;
FIGS. 137 and 138 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that generates two diffe, r, ent random numbers and displays them on two waveform charts;
FIGS. 139 and 140 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that continuously generates random numbers and displays them inside digital indicators until a stop button is pressed;
FIG. 141 illustrates a modified block diagram of the VI illustrated in FIGS. 139-140, where the slide is immediately latched back to standby after each number is generated;
FIG. 142 illustrates selection of a global variable from the Structs and Constants menu;
FIG. 143 illustrates the Structs and Constants menu;
FIG. 144 illustrates a global variable node;
FIG. 145 illustrates a panel having three globals;
FIG. 146 illustrates selection of a specific global variable desired to be accessed;
FIG. 147 illustrates using the operating tool to click on a global variable node and choosing the desired global variable;
FIG. 148 illustrates a change to write global selection;
FIG. 149 is a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the block diagram editor when a global variable is created;
FIG. 150 illustrates two VIs running simultaneously which include a global variable used to terminate both VIs;
FIGS. 151 and 154 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a global variable VI;
FIGS. 152A-B illustrate elements used in the block diagram of FIG. 154;
FIG. 153 illustrates selection of a stop button used to pass values between two concurrently running VIs;
FIGS. 155-156 are a front panel and block diagram of a VI that reads from a global variable;
FIGS. 157-158 illustrate the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses both global and local variables.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
The following U.S. Patents are hereby incorporated by reference.
U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221 titled "Graphical System for Modeling a Process and Associated Method," issued on Feb. 13, 1990.
U.S. Pat. No. 4,914,568 titled "Graphical System for Modeling a Process and Associated Method," issued on Apr. 3, 1990.
The following U.S. patent applications are hereby incorporated by reference.
U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/380,329 filed Jul. 12, 1989 titled "Graphical Method for Programming a Virtual Instrument," now U.S. Pat. No. 5,301,336.
U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/979,416 filed Nov. 19, 1992 titled "Graphical System for Executing a Process and for Programming a Computer to Execute a Process, Including Graphical Variable Inputs and Variable Outputs" which is now U.S. Pat. No. 5,291,587.
U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/647,785 titled "Polymorphic Data Flow Block Diagram System and Method for Programming a Computer" and filed Jan. 30, 1991, which is now U.S. Pat. No. 5,301,301.
Referring now to FIG. 2, a system 28 for modeling a process or creating a data flow program is shown. The system 28 includes a respective block diagram editor 30, an execution subsystem 32, an icon editor 34, and a front panel editor 36 all interconnected. The system 28 also includes a control processor 38 which connects to each of the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30 and execution subsystem 32. The system 28 can be used for a number of purposes. In the preferred embodiment, the system 28 is shown primarily in creating "virtual instruments" (VIs), which are instruments created in software. However, the system 28 of the present invention has many other applications, including modeling a process or any other type of general programming.
As will be explained more fully below, the block diagram editor 30 is used to construct and display a graphical diagram, referred to as a block diagram, which visually displays a procedure by which a value for a input variable produces a value for one or more output variables. This procedure, together with the input and output variables, comprises a process model. Furthermore, as the user constructs the graphical diagram, the block diagram editor 30 constructs execution instructions which characterize an execution procedure which corresponds to the displayed procedure. In the preferred embodiment, the block diagram editor 30 constructs instructions in the machine language which execute the block diagram created by the user. The execution subsystem 32 assigns at least one value to the input variable and executes the execution instructions to produce a value for the output variable. In the preferred embodiment, the block diagram editor 30 and the execution subsystem 32 are constructed in software. The control processor 38 implements the block diagram editor 30 and the execution subsystem 32 of the preferred embodiment.
The system 28 permits a user to construct a virtual instrument (also referred to as a VI) 40 such as that represented in generalized form in the illustrative drawings of FIG. 3. The virtual instrument 40 includes a front panel 42 which permits interactive use of the virtual instrument 40 by a user. As will be explained more fully below, the front panel 42 permits graphical representation of input and output variables provided to the virtual instrument 40. The respective graphical representations on the front panel 42 for input and output variables are referred to as controls and indicators, respectively; although in some instances controls and indicators are referred to collectively as controls. The virtual instrument 40 also includes an icon 44 which permits use of the virtual instrument 40 as a subunit in other virtual instruments (not shown). The virtual instrument 40 also includes a block diagram 46 which graphically provides a visual representation of a procedure or method by which a specified value for an input variable displayed in the front panel 42 can produce a corresponding value for an output variable in the front panel 42. In other words, the user uses the block diagram editor 30 to create a graphical program, and the resultant graphical icons appear in the block diagram 46. The virtual instrument 40 itself is a hierarchical construction which may comprise within its block diagram 46 respective icons 48 and 50 referencing other virtual instruments (sub-VIs) indicated generally by respective blocks 52 and 54. The block diagram 46 may also include one or more "primitives" corresponding to simple functions that may be performed. Together sub-VIs, primitives and other types of data processing elements comprised within the block diagram 46 are referred to as function icons. Function icons in the block diagram 46 have associated control means or software which implement the desired functions.
The generalized block diagram of FIG. 4 shows an instrumentation system 56 incorporating the system 28 shown in FIG. 2. Elements of the instrumentation system 56 which are substantially identical to those of second system 28 are designated with the same reference numerals as those of the system 28 for convenience. The instrumentation system 56 includes a keyboard and display 58 and an instrument 60. In a presently preferred embodiment, the control processor 38 and the keyboard and display 58 may be implemented using any type of general purpose computer.
The instrumentation system 56 is preferably used to control the instrument 60, i.e., acquire data from the instrument 60, analyze that data, store that data, and present that data to the user in a meaningful way. The block diagram editor 30 can also be used to create virtual instruments as desired.
FIG. 5 illustrates various design choices available in an instrumentation system 204 in the preferred embodiment. As shown, a computer system 206 programmed according to the present invention can interface with a unit under test 212, i.e., can perform data acquisition and control of the unit under test 212, using a number of methods. These methods include using GPIB instruments 12, plug-in data acquisition boards 19 with associated signal conditioning logic 11, or VXI instruments 14. In addition a serial RS-232 method (not shown) can be used, as desired. It is noted that the computer 206 may be any type of computer including any type of Apple computer, IBM PC-compatible computer, PS/2, Sun workstation, etc.
FIG. 5A shows an illustrative hardware configuration of an instrumentation system 204 according to the present invention. The system 204 includes a computer 206 which includes the control processor 38 as well as the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30, and execution subsystem 32. As previously mentioned the elements 30-36 are preferably implemented in software. The computer 206 illustrated in FIG. 5 includes an interface to a GPIB (general purpose instrument bus) 207 which in turn is connected to a Tektronix 5010 Function generator 208 and a Fluke 8840A digital multimeter 210. A unit under test 212 is coupled between the function generator 208 and multimeter 210 as shown.
Referring ahead briefly to FIG. 22, a computer generated display of a completed block diagram for the instrumentation system 204 in FIG. 5A is shown. The block diagram in FIG. 22 is created by a user using the block diagram editor 30 of FIG. 2. As previously mentioned, the block diagram is essentially the graphical program representing the instrumentation system's operation and shows the interconnections between the elements of the instrument, the signal paths, and the relationship to other virtual instruments. Referring again to FIG. 5, a user uses the block diagram editor 30 to create the block diagram 46 in FIG. 22 to control the operation of the instrumentation system 204. Also, as discussed further below, the user uses the front panel editor 36 to create a front panel 42 to control the function or waveform generator 208 and multimeter 210. Once the block diagram 46 and front panel 42 have been created using the block diagram editor 30 and front panel editor 36, the user can then execute the block diagram (FIG. 22) using the execution subsystem 32. As discussed further below, the block diagram 46 can, for example, control the output of the waveform generator 208 to the unit under test 212 and can also be used to receive, analyze and present the output from the unit under test 212 which is provided from the multimeter 210.
It is also noted that other types of configurations for an instrumentation system 204 may be used. As discussed with regard to FIG. 5, instead of using actual instruments 208 and 210, the instrumentation system 204 may include one or more modular instruments on plug-in boards in conjunction with the VXI bus specification. The plug-in board instruments would then assume the function of the function generator 208 and multimeter 210. In addition, instead of requiring instruments 208 and 210 or plug-in modular instruments, the computer 206 can include a data acquisition card including A-D (analog to digital) and D-A (digital to analog) convertors, wherein the D-A convertor generates waveform signals to the unit under test 212 and the output from the unit under test 212 is then provided through an A-D convertor to the computer system 206.
Referring now to FIG. 6, a block diagram of the computer system 206 is shown. The elements of a computer system not necessary to understand the operation of the present invention have been omitted for simplicity. The computer system 206 includes a central processing unit or CPU 21 which is coupled to a processor or host bus 24. The CPU 21 acts as the control processor 38. The CPU may be any of various types, including an Intel x86 processor such as the i486, a CPU from the Motorola family of processors, as well as others. Main memory 22 is coupled to the host bus 24 by means of memory controller 23. The main memory 22 stores the front panel editor 36, icon editor 34, block diagram editor 30 and execution subsystem 32. Host bus 24 is coupled to an expansion or input/output bus 26 by means of a bus controller 25. The expansion bus 26 includes slots for various devices, including video 16 and hard drive 17. In one embodiment where the system and method of the present invention are used in an instrumentation application, a data acquisition card 19 is connected to the expansion bus 26. The data acquisition card 19 receives analog signals from an external sensor or instrument and in turn produces digital data that is provided to the CPU 21 and used by the system and method of the present invention. The computer system 206 also includes a GPIB (General Purpose Interface Bus) card 18 that interfaces to one or more instruments via the GPIB bus 15. The computer system 206 also includes an MXI card 10 that connects to VXI chassis 14.
The following discussion regarding data flow principles and a virtual instrument data structure diagram will assist in understanding the operation of the block diagram editor 30 and the execution subsystem 32 of the system 28 and the instrumentation system 56.
Referring now to FIG. 7, a block diagram 186 of an exemplary data flow system is shown. The block diagram 186 includes three respective input registers 188, 190 and 192 which provide an accumulation of input data. As soon as all input data are present, output of AND gate 194 becomes TRUE, and computation and/or control element 196 will begin computation. The computation element 196 begins generating output data which are stored in respective output registers 198, 200 and 202. When all output data are available, an output token is generated by the computation element 196 indicating that output data are available for transmission to a next system (not shown). It will be appreciated that the computation element 196 can be a combination of more than one subsystem (not shown).
FIG. 8A illustrates a virtual instrument data structure diagram. The system 28 of FIG. 2 and the instrumentation system 56 of FIG. 4 each utilize the principles set forth in the data structure diagram of FIG. 8A. It will be appreciated that implementation of a system utilizing a data structure such as that diagrammed in the diagram of FIG. 8A advantageously permits the implementation of an extended data flow system like that illustrated in FIG. 7.
Furthermore, it will be appreciated that implementation of the data structure like that of the diagram of FIG. 8A advantageously permits the implementation of a system in which execution instructions are constructed in a graphical fashion. More particularly, execution instructions are constructed by constructing a visual display or block diagram in which at least one input variable produces at least output variable according to a displayed procedure. Furthermore, the execution instructions are constructed such that, when a value is assigned to a particular input variable, a value for a corresponding output variable is produced according to the procedure illustrated in the visual display. Additionally, the execution instructions are constructed in response to the construction of a block diagram comprising the graphical display. Thus, a user need only construct an appropriate visual display or block diagram in order to construct the execution instructions.
Moreover, implementation of data flow principles by using a data structure such as that shown in the diagram of FIG. 8A advantageously permits the use of parallel processing which increases the speed with which the execution of execution instructions can be accomplished.
More particularly, FIG. 8A shows a system representation of a virtual instrument. Boxes 8a-8k, indicate conceptual objects in the system that have well-defined properties. Objects 8i, 8j, and 8k are grouped into shaded box 8s and share some properties and form a class of objects.
As indicated in FIG. 8B which represents a legend applicable to the illustration or FIG. 8A, a solid line with an arrow is used to indicate a potential one-to-many relationship, i.e., the source object contains zero or more destination objects (e.g., a vehicle containing zero or more wheels). A dashed line with an arrow is used to indicate a potential one-to-one relationship, i.e., the source object may reference zero or one destination object (e.g., a library book may or may not have a borrower).
Line 8n indicates that a virtual instrument 8b contains a front panel with a multiplicity ot controls 8c. A control may be of clustered type in which case it contains a multiplicity of subcontrols as indicated by line 8p. Line 8q indicates that a virtual instrument contains an icon with a multiplicity of terminals 8d. Line 8l indicates that virtual instruments also contains a multiplicity of block diagrams 8e.
In the system or the present invention, a virtual instrument either contains one diagram or none. Built in virtual instruments representing primitive computations (primitives) have no diagrams. Line 8r indicates that a block diagram contains a multiplicity of objects or the node class. A block diagram contains exactly one self reference node 8i, and an arbitrary number of structure nodes 8j or instrument use nodes 8k. Line 8t indicates that a structure node contains a multiplicity of subdiagrams.
As discussed below with regard to FIGS. 12A-D, a sequence structure or a conditional structure contains one or more subdiagrams, and an iterative loop structure or indefinite loop structure contains exactly one subdiagram. Line 8m indicates that an instrument use node (I-use node) is used to reference another virtual instrument. The instrument use node may reference a virtual instrument in real-time; or it may rererence previous data acquired by the virtual instrument. Line 8u indicates that each object ot the node class contains a multiplicity of terminals 8g. Line 8v indicates that a block diagram also contains a multiplicity or signal paths 8f. Each signal path contains a multiplicity of terminals as indicated by line 8w. There is at most one terminal per signal path that is designated as the source or the signal. Each terminal contained in a signal path also is contained in a node. However, there may be terminals in nodes which are not in signal paths. The terminals in a signal path are typically in dirrerent nodes. Lines 8y and 8z indicate that each terminal may reference a front panel control or a block diagram control (e.g., a constant). A terminal references exactly one control, and it is either on the front panel or on the block diagram.
Execution Subsystem
Referring now to FIGS. 9A-L, a flowchart diagram illustrating the operation of the execution subsystem is shown. In FIG. 9A, the main execution loop of the block diagram execution subsystem is shown. At power on, in step 302 the execution subsystem 32 initializes the run queue. The run queue is the main queue in which all nodes are scheduled to be operated on by the execution subsystem 32. As discussed further below, the initial node is scheduled on the run queue by the execution subsystem 32, with all subsequent nodes in the block diagram being scheduled by preceding nodes in the data flow diagram. In step 304 the execution subsystem 32 relinquishes control to allow other graphical environment functions to be performed. For example, other functions include the front panel editor 36 which allows a user to create a front panel, the icon editor 34 which allows a user to create and edit icons, the block diagram editor 30 which allows a user to use the graphical programming environment to create programs, etc. These other functions at some point will invoke the execution subsystem 32. For example, when the user builds a block diagram and then clicks on the run arrow to execute the diagram, the execution subsystem 32 is invoked. When the execution subsystem 32 is invoked, the subsystem 32 checks the run queue to determine if anything has been placed on the queue. If nothing is placed on the run queue in step 306, then the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 304 and allows other systems to perform their functions until something is placed on the queue.
If a node is placed on the run queue in step 306, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 308 and de-queues the node having the highest priority. In step 310 the execution subsystem 32 executes the node. The node execution step includes executing all or a portion of a node and is discussed in much greater detail below. Upon completion of step 310, the execution subsystem 32 then advances to step 312 and determines whether the node has indicated a desire to be re-queued on the run queue. In general, if only a portion of the node was executed in step 310, the node will indicate in its return that it wishes to be replaced on the run queue to have its remaining portion executed. If the node has expressed a desire to be re-queued on the run queue in step 312, i.e. if the node has not been fully completed in step 310, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 314, re-enqueues the node on the run queue, and then returns back to step 304. If the node has completed in step 310 and thus the node has not indicated a desire to be re-placed on the run queue, the execution subsystem 32 returns from step 312 directly to step 304. In step 304 other parts of the graphical programming environment execute. When control returns to the execution subsystem 32, the execution subsystem 32 performs steps 306-314 as previously described.
Referring now to FIG. 9B, a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of step 310, the execute node step, in FIG. 9A is shown. In step 320, the execution subsystem performs node specific functions, i.e., specific functions for the particular type or node being executed. As discussed further below, a plurality of different types of nodes can be placed on the run queue, including a self reference node, an instrument use node, a simple node such as a primitive node or code interface node, a loop structure node, a case structure node, a sequence structure node, an asynchronous node, and a long computational node. The specific functions performed by the execution subsystem for respective nodes are discussed further below with regard to FIGS. 9C-9K. When the node-specific functions have been executed in step 320, the execution subsystem 32 determines in step 322 if execution of the node has completed. If not, the subsystem 32 returns to step 312 and determines if the node should be re-queued on the run queue. If the node has completed in step 322, the subsystem 32 advances to step 324. In step 324 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the node being executed has any outputs that need to be propagated. If the node has any outputs then a certain number of those output signals will need to be propagated to subsequent nodes in the data flow diagram. If no more output signals need to be propagated, the execution subsystem 32 sets the desire to be requeued for that respective node to false in step 325 and returns to step 312. Since the node was determined to have completed step 322 and has propagated all of its signals in step 324, the node has completed all operations, and thus its desire to be requeued is set to false.
If the node does include more output signals which need to be propagated, the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 326 and copies the data that was computed in step 320 to destination nodes, i.e., nodes which receive the outputs of the respective node being executed as inputs. The destination nodes are the respective nodes which the outputs of the node being executed are connected to. In step 328 the execution subsystem 32 decrements the destination node's short count, which is described below.
Each node includes two count numbers referred to as a fire count and a short count. Each node's fire count refers to the number of inputs received by that node. Prior to execution of the block diagram, the node's short count is set to the respective node's fire count. For example, if a node has three inputs, the node's fire count would be three, and prior to execution the node's short count would also be set to three. As various output signals are produced which are received as inputs to that respective node, the short count is decremented until all inputs to that node have been received. When the node's short count has reached zero, then all inputs to that node have been received. When this occurs the node is ready for execution and thus can be placed on the run queue. In other words, a node can only be placed on the run queue for execution when all of its inputs have been received, i.e. all nodes having outputs connected to the inputs of the respective node have executed and have propagated their signals to the respective node. Thus, in step 326 when data is copied to a destination node, one of the inputs to that destination node has received its required data and thus the destination node's short count is decremented.
In step 330 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the destination node's short count has reached zero. If that node's destination short count has reached zero, then that destination node is enqueued on the run queue in step 332. The execution subsystem 32 then returns to step 324 to determine if any more output signals need to be propagated. If the respective destination node's short count has not reached zero in step 330, then that destination node is not enqueued on the run queue, but rather the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 324. The subsystem 32 continues to execute steps 324-332 as long as any output signals need to be propagated from the respective node.
Node Specific Function Execution
Referring now to FIGS. 9C-K, the node-specific function executed in step 320 of FIG. 9B depend on the type of node being executed. As previously discussed, there are a plurality of different nodes that can be executed, including a self-reference node, loop structure node, case structure node, etc. Each type of node includes a plurality of different starting points where execution can begin in step 320, these starting points being referred to as 0 for the initial starting point or initial execution of the node and 1 for a later starting point of execution in the node. The exception to this is the long computational node which includes three starting points referred to as 0, 1, and 2.
Self Reference Node Execution
FIGS. 9C and 9D illustrate the steps performed if the node executed in step 320 is a self-reference node. In step 342, the execution subsystem 32 determines if this is the initial call to the 0 starting point of the self-reference node at the beginning of the respective diagram, or a call to the self-reference node at starting point 1 signifying the end of a diagram. Each VI, sub-VI, and loop diagram includes a self-reference node that is referenced when the diagram is entered to initialize the node and propagate signals to the node and also when the diagram is exited to place the node that called the self-reference node back on the run queue. In step 344 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the self-reference node being executed is a top level self-reference node, i.e., a self-reference node corresponding to a main block diagram. If not, the subsystem 32 advances to step 350. If so, the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 346 and determines if the self-reference node being executed was called as a sub-VI. If the self-reference node was determined to have been called as a sub-VI in step 346, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 348 and copies in the parameters from the instrument (I-use) node that called the self-reference node, referred to as the caller I-use node, which is at the head of the wait queue. The wait queue is described further below. The execution subsystem 32 then advances to step 350. If the self-reference node was not called as a sub-VI, the subsystem 32 advances directly to step 350.
In step 350 for each node comprised within the self-reference node's diagram, the execution subsystem 32 sets each node's short count to its fire count. In step 351 the execution subsystem 32 sets each node's starting point to its initial starting point, i.e. starting point 0. The subsystem 32 also sets the starting point of itself to its second starting point, starting point 1, in step 352. In step 353 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true and returns to step 322. It is noted here that setting node complete to true where the node was entered at starting point 0 is different from all other nodes. With regard to all other nodes, node complete is set to true only at the last entry into the node. For a self-reference node, node complete is set to true in step 353 at starting point 0 of the node because it is necessary to propagate all signals to the nodes in the diagram associated with the self-reference node at the initial call to the self-reference node. With all other nodes, node complete is set to true after execution of the node, i.e., only after the last starting point of the node has been entered and the node has completed.
If the node-specific function is not an initial call to starting point 0 of the self-reference node in step 342, but rather enters at starting point 1, meaning the self-reference node is at the end of its respective diagram, then in step 354 the execution subsystem 32 again determines if the self-reference node corresponds to the diagram of a top level block diagram. If not, then the self-reference node corresponds to the diagram of a structure node such as a loop structure node, a case structure node, or a sequence structure node. The execution subsystem 32 advances to step 356 and enqueues the owning structure node of the self-reference node diagram on the run queue. The execution subsystem 32 then advances to step 364 and resets the self-reference node starting point to 0.
If the self-reference node does correspond to a top level diagram in step 354, then in step 358, the execution subsystem 32 determines if the caller I-use node is at the self-reference node wait queue head. Each self-reference node includes a wait queue where the I-use node corresponding to a call to the subVI is enqueued. This is for the situation where the self-reference node being executed corresponds to that of a sub-VI when it is called from an I-use node.
The wait queue is for the situation where a higher level VI (also referred to as a caller VI) includes one or more usages of a sub-Vl, i.e. one or more instrument usage nodes (referred to as caller I-use nodes) for the same sub-VI. Where two or more usages of a sub-VI are comprised within a caller VI, it is imperative that only one usage of that sub-VI be executing at any one time (parallel or reentrant mode is discussed later). This is because each sub-VI includes its own block diagram having a corresponding self-reference node. Since there is only one self-reference node for the sub-VI (in serial node), only one version of that sub-VI can be running at any one time. Therefore, the execution subsystem must ensure that only one usage of a sub-VI executes from start to finish before another usage of the same sub-VI is initiated. In summary, since each sub-VI includes only one self-reference node in serial mode, only one usage of that sub-VI can execute at any one time, and thus the sub-VI includes a wait queue where calls to that sub-VI are placed to ensure that only one usage of the sub-VI is executing at any one time.
If the caller I-use node is not at the wait queue head in step 358, the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 364. If the caller I-use node is at the wait queue head, then the execution subsystem 32 advances to step 360 and copies out the parameters to the caller I-use node. The execution subsystem 32 then dequeues the caller I-use node from the self-reference node wait queue in step 361 and enqueues the caller I-use on the run queue in step 362. This completes a single usage of this VI as a subVI.
In step 364, the execution subsystem 32 resets the self-reference node starting point to starting point 0, i.e., the initial starting point. Thus, when the self-reference node is again called, it will be as if it were an initial self-reference node call in step 342. Upon completion of step 364, node complete is set to false in step 366, and the execution subsystem 32 determines if another instrument usage node is at the wait queue head in step 368. If not, then in step 370 the execution subsystem 32 sets the node wish to be requeued to false and returns to step 312. If another instrument usage node is determined to be at the wait queue head in step 368, then in step 372 the execution subsystem 32 sets the desire to be requeued to a true value and returns to step 312. In this instance, the diagram corresponding to the self-reference node has again been invoked, and thus the self-reference node needs to be requeued.
Instrument Use Node
An instrument use or usage node (I-use node) is used to call a sub-VI diagram, or more correctly is used to call the self-reference node of a sub-VI diagram. Referring now to FIG. 9E, a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the instrument use node is shown. In step 382 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the I-use node is at starting point 0, i.e. this is the initial entry into the I-use node. If not, then in step 396 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true. In this instance, this is the second call to the respective I-use node, i.e. the I-use node starting point is at 1. Thus node complete is set equal to true and the node completes. This will happen when the subVI has finished executing on behalf of this Instrument usage node.
If the I-use node is at its 0 starting point in step 382, then in step 384 the execution subsystem 32 sets the I-use node starting point to 1. This is done so that the next entry to this I-use node causes the decision in step 382 to be false. In step 386 the execution subsystem 32 queues the I-use node on the sub-VI diagram's self-reference node wait queue. This is a queue where the calling nodes wait their turn to run a respective sub-VI's top level diagram, i.e. a respective sub-VI. As previously noted, if multiple usages of the respective sub-VI or diagram appear in a caller top level block diagram, only one usage of the sub-VI or diagram can execute at any one time because each contains only self-reference node. Therefore, calling I-use nodes must wait their turn in the wait queue to be able to run a respective sub-VI.
In step 388, the execution subsystem 32 determines if the I-use node is at the head of the sub-VI self-reference node wait queue. If the I-use node is at the head of the self-reference node wait queue in step 388, then in step 390 it enqueues the sub-VI self-reference node on the run queue. The execution subsystem then advances to step 392. If the I-use node is not at the head of the wait queue in step 388, then the execution subsystem 32 advances directly to step 392. (in this situation the subVI is already executing on behalf of another caller I-use node.)
In step 392, the execution subsystem sets node complete to false. Since this was the 0 starting point of the I-use node and the self-reference node was just placed on the run queue in step 390, node complete is set to false to enable the I-use node to be called again to complete operations at a later time when the subVI finishes executing on it's behalf. In step 394 the execution subsystem sets the desire to be requeued to false. In this situation, the sub-VI self-reference node has been placed on the run queue and is required to run before the instrument use node is again called at the end of the sub-VI self-reference node execution. Therefore, instead of setting the desire to requeue the I-use node to true, the sub-VI self-reference has the task of placing the I-use node on the run queue, which occurs in step 362 at FIG. 9D. The I-use node execution then completes.
Simple Node
Referring now to FIG. 9F, a flowchart diagram illustrating the execution of a simple node is shown. A simple node includes primitive nodes and code interface nodes. In step 398, the execution subsystem 32 performs the function indicated by the node. For example, if the node is a simple add or subtract node or an attribute node, bundle node, etc., the execution subsystem 32 performs the indicated operation. If the node being executed is a code interface node, then in step 398 the execution subsystem 32 invokes a text-based language routine previously created by the user which performs a desired function. In step 399 the execution subsystem 32 sets node complete to true. Thus, when the execution subsystem 32 returns to step 322 in FIG. 9B, the node's output signals will be propagated in steps 324-332.
Loop Structure Node
A loop structure node corresponds to an iterative loop structure node or an indefinite loop structure node, which are discussed with reference to FIGS. 12B and 12D. Referring now to FIG. 9G, if the node being executed in step 310 is a loop structure node, then the following node specific functions are executed in step 320. In step 402 the execution subsystem 32 determines if it has begun execution at the loop node's 0 starting point, i.e. the loop node's initial starting point. If so, then in step 404 the execution subsystem 32 sets the loop node starting point to 1. In step 406 the subsystem 32 prepares a loop counter and in step 408 prepares auto-indexing for the loop. Auto-indexing is a feature of loop structure nodes wherein arrays are indexed or accumulated at the loop boundary automatically. In step 410 the execution subsystem 32 enqueues the self-reference node (SRN) of the subdiagram on the run queue. In step 412 the subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 414 sets the node's desire to be requeued to false. The node's desire to be requeued is set to false because the node places itself back on the run queue in step 424, as discussed below.
If execution of the loop begins at starting point 1 and hence this is not the loop's initial starting point in step 402, then in step 416 the subsystem increments the loop counter to index into the loop. The execution subsystem 32 progresses auto-indexing in step 417 and evaluates the reiteration in step 418. In step 420 the subsystem 32 determines if the loop will reiterate. If not, then the loop is done, i.e., the loop has finished iterating, and the subsystem sets node complete to true in step 422 and returns to step 322 (FIG. 9B). It finishes the auto-indexing feature in step 421. Here it is noted that the node complete question in step 322 will be answered in the affirmative and thus the subsystem will advance to step 324 and propagate signals. If the loop has not completed and thus further iterations are determined to be required in step 420, then in step 424 the subsystem 32 enqueues the subdiagram self-reference node on the run queue in step 420 and advances to step 412. In steps 412 and 414, node complete is set to false and the desire to be requeued is also set to false. The execution subsystem then returns to step 322 (FIG. 9B). Here it is noted that the node complete question in step 322 will be answered in the negative, and thus the subsystem will return back to step 312 (FIG. 9A).
Case Structure Node
A case structure node corresponds to the conditional structure illustrated in FIG. 12C. Referring now to FIG. 9H, if the node being executed in step 310 is a case structure, then the node specific functions performed in step 320 are as follows. In step 430 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the case node has been entered at its 0 starting point, i.e. if this is the initial entry into execution of the case node. If so, then in step 432 the execution subsystem sets the starting point of the case node to 1. Thus, the next time the case node is entered, the question in step 430 will be answered in the negative. In step 434 the execution subsystem 32 checks the select input to determine which of the N diagrams will run. In other words, since a case statement includes a number of possible cases, one of which will be executed depending upon the select input, the input must be checked to determine which of the N diagrams in the case statement will be executed. In step 436 the subsystem enqueues the selected subdiagram self-reference node on the run queue. In step 438, the execution subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 440 sets the desire to be requeued to false. Execution then completes. If the case node starting point is determined to be 1 in step 430, then in step 441 the execution subsystem sets node complete to true and then completes.
Sequence Structure Node
A sequence structure node corresponds to the sequence structure illustrated in FIG. 12A. Referring now to FIG. 9I, if the node executed in step 310 is a sequence structure node, then the following node specific functions are executed in step 320. In step 442, the subsystem determines if this is the initial starting point (starting point 0) for the sequence structure node. If so, then in step 444 the subsystem 32 sets the sequence node starting point to 1. In step 446 the execution subsystem 32 sets a variable referred to as Diagram Number to zero. The variable Diagram Number refers to the particular diagram of the sequence structure, which includes a plurality of diagrams. In step 448 the subsystem 32 enqueues the Diagram Number's self-reference node on the run queue. In step 450 the subsystem 32 sets node complete to false and completes.
If the entry into the sequence structure node is determined not to be the initial entry in step 442, but rather is determined to be entry at starting point 1, then in step 452 the subsystem 32 increments the variable Diagram Number by one. In step 454 the subsystem 32 then determines if Diagram Number is equal to N, i.e. if all the diagrams in the sequence structure node have been executed. If not, the execution subsystem returns to step 4.48 and enqueues the self-reference node of the next Diagram Number on the run queue and sets node complete to false in step 450. If all the diagrams have been executed in step 454, then the subsystem 32 sets node complete to true and completes. It is noted that the node will be determined to have completed in step 322 (FIG. 9B), and thus the subsystem 32 will then proceed to step 324 to propagate its signals.
Asynchronous Node
An asynchronous node is a node which is required to wait on external events before executing. Referring now to FIG. 9J, if the node executed in step 310 is an asynchronous node then the following node specific functions are executed in step 320. In step 460 the execution subsystem 32 determines if the asynchronous node has entered execution 32 at starting point 0. If so, then in step 462 the execution subsystem 32 sets the node starting point to 1 so that a subsequent entry into this node will affect a negative choice in step 460. In step 464 the execution subsystem 32 provides the respective external device with information needed to asynchronously enqueue this node after external functions have completed. For example, this external device may be a timer or a device driver or it may be another node if an occurrence has been set. For more information on occurrences, please see related co-pending application Ser. No. 08/125,642, entitled "Method and Apparatus for More Efficient Function Synchronization in a Data Flow Program," and filed Sep. 22, 1993, which is hereby incorporated by reference. In step 466 the execution subsystem sets node complete to false and then in step 468 sets the desire to be requeued to false. The node specific function for the asynchronous node then completes. At some later time after the respective external device has completed operations and has enqueued the asynchronous node, the asynchronous node will again be entered in step 460. If an occurrence has been set, the node will be re-entered in step 460 when the occurrence is triggered. For more information on this, please see the above-referenced application. When the node is reentered, the asynchronous node starting point will be determined to be 1. When this occurs, node complete is set equal to true in step 470 and the node specific operation for the asynchronous node completes.
Long Computational Node
A long computational node can be described as a node which requires a large amount of computation and thus is required to share execution time with other nodes. Unlike other nodes, the long computational node includes any number of different starting points. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9K, the long computational node includes three different starting points referred to as 0, 1, and 2. Referring now to FIG. 9K, when the long computational node is first called, it enters at starting point 0, its initial starting point. In step 482 the execution subsystem 32 sets its starting point to a later point referred to as point 1. In step 484 the execution subsystem 32 begins computation on the long computational node, performing a portion of the computation required. In step 486 the subsystem sets node complete to false and in step 488 sets the desire to be requeued to true. The desire to be requeued is set to true because further computations are required to complete the node.
When the long computational node is again entered, it enters at point 1. As shown in step 492, the execution subsystem 32 sets the starting point to 2. In step 492 the execution subsystem 32 performs further computations on the node. In steps 494 and 496 the subsystem 32 sets node complete to false and sets the desire to be requeued to true, respectively.
When the long computational node is entered for a third time, it enters at starting point 2. In step 497, the subsystem 32 finishes computation on the node and in step 498 sets node complete to true. It is again noted that additional similar stages may be present and a long computational node with 3 stages is shown only as an example.
Starting a Top Level VI
Referring now to FIG. 9L, a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the routine which kicks off the first self-reference node of a large block diagram is shown. In step 499 the execution subsystem 32 enqueues the top level diagram's self-reference node on the run queue. This flowchart is necessary to place the first self-reference node on the run queue. Subsequent to this, the self-reference node places other nodes within respective self-reference node on the run queue. As data output signals are propagated, other nodes in turn are placed on the run queue and so forth. The operation in FIG. 9L is necessary merely to place the initial self-reference node in the run queue to "kick things off."
Execution Subsystem Operation Overview
The following description summarizes and further describes the operation of the execution subsystem 32 of the system 28 and the instrumentation system 56.
The first step in the execution of a virtual instrument is accomplished by executing its block diagram. The first step in the execution of a block diagram is accomplished by scanning the terminals contained in the diagram's self-reference node. For each terminal which is the source of a signal, the data token is moved from the control reference by the terminal to the terminal itself. The second step in the execution of a diagram is to initialize the token short-count of each node in the diagram to the number of input signals to that node, i.e. its fire count. The third step in the execution of a diagram is to propagate signals from the self-reference node. Propagation of signals from a node is accomplished by scanning all of the node's terminals. For each terminal that is source of a signal the data token on the terminal is copied to each destination terminal of the signal path. Each token placed on a destination terminal causes the short-count of the node containing the terminal to be decremented. If it becomes zero in the process, then that node is scheduled to execute.
The first step in the execution of a node is accomplished by copying the tokens from the node's terminals to the reference controls. The second step depends upon the type of node. For an instrument use node that references a real-time virtual instrument, the next execution step is to copy the tokens from the node's controls to the virtual instrument's controls and to execute the virtual instrument. For an instrument use node that references previously stored data of a virtual instrument, the tokens from the appropriate data record are read in and placed on the node's terminals. For a sequence structure node, the next step is to execute the first subdiagram. For a conditional structure node, the next step is to execute the subdiagram indicated by the value of the token on the selected control. For an iterative or indefinite loop structure node, the next step is to set the value of the token on the iteration number control to zero and to execute the subdiagram. For a self-reference node, the next step is to perform the next step in the execution of the node or the virtual instrument which contains the diagram that contains the self-reference node.
The third step in the execution of a node also depends upon the type of node. For an instrument use node or a conditional structure node the output data tokens are propagated along the signal paths. For a sequence structure node, the next subdiagram is executed, if one exists, and if not, the output tokens are propagated. For a loop structure node, the shift registers are clocked (the data is shifted), the iteration number incremented, and the subdiagram is reexecuted, if appropriate; otherwise the output tokens are propagated.
The second step in the execution of the virtual instrument is to log the tokens on the front panel controls if data logging is enabled. The third step in the execution of the virtual instrument is to copy the tokens from the virtual instrument's indicators to the instrument use node's output terminals and to schedule the instrument use node to execute its next step. The third step of virtual instrument execution is performed only if the virtual instrument was executed in response to an instrument use node request. If the virtual instrument was executed interactively, there is no third step.
Front Panel Generation
FIG. 10 shows details of an illustrative front panel 62 which is produced using the front panel editor 36 and which is displayed using the keyboard and display 58. It will be appreciated that the illustration of FIG. 10 represents an actual graphical computer-generated display of an exemplary front panel for the instrument 60. The graphical representation of FIG. 10 illustrates physical control dials and switches for providing variable input information and illustrates a coordinate plane type indicator for displaying variable output information. More particularly, FIG. 10 shows a circular turn-dial and a slide switch for setting input variable data. The turn-dial and slide switch each correspond to respective rectangular boxes for digitally illustrating variable input data in digital form. The illustrative front panel also includes a display for illustrating variable output data. The graphical representations of input controls and output indicators are stored in a memory library, and a user may select from among a variety of different graphical representations of input controls and output indicators in order to construct a panel display which conforms to a user's intuitive understanding of how the instrument 60 is controlled and how it provides data.
FIG. 11 illustrates an icon 64 which can be used to reference a front panel (not shown). A visual representation of the icon 64 can be produced using the icon editor 34. The icon 64 corresponds to a particular front panel (not shown). As will be explained more fully below, the icon 64 can be used as a building-block in a hierarchical system constructed using the block diagram editor 30. The dashed lines of FIG. 11 indicate the one-to-one correspondence between the icon 64 and the respective two-dimensional regions (or hot spots) 66 and 68 which correspond to respective variable input data and variable output data illustrated by controls and displays of the corresponding front panel (not shown). For example, the front panel might include input data in the form a sequence of samples and might provide output data in the form of an indicator showing voltage reading per sample. The icon 64 then might be divided into two two- dimensional regions 68 and 66 which respectively correspond to the input sample count and the voltage reading for that sample count.
Structure Nodes
The drawings of FIGS. 12A-E show the graphical representations of structures utilized in constructing a block diagram as described below using the block diagram editor 30. The structures represented in FIGS. 12A-E substantially facilitate the application of data flow programming techniques which are used in the preferred embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 12A illustrates a sequence structure. FIG. 12B illustrates an iterative loop structure. FIG. 12C illustrates a conditional structure. FIG. 12D illustrates an indefinite loop structure. FIG. 12E illustrates a shift register on an indefinite loop structure.
It will be appreciated that the graphical representations of the structures illustrated in FIGS. 12A-E can be stored in a memory library as can execution instructions corresponding to the respective structures. Thus, a user can call upon a graphical structure library in order to display any one or more of the structures using the display facilities of the control processor 38 and keyboard and display 58 of the instrumentation system of FIG. 4.
Sequence Structure
The sequence structure, which has its graphical representation illustrated in FIG. 12A, serves to divide a data-flow diagram into two subdiagrams, one representing an inside and another representing an outside of the sequence structure borders. The outside diagram behaves exactly as if the sequence structure and its contents were replaced by an icon with a terminal (or hot spot) for each line crossing the sequence structure border. The drawing of FIG. 12A shows a three-diagram sequence. In order to minimize space used on a computer console screen, only one diagram of the sequence structure is visible at a time. Inside the structure border, multiple diagrams (not shown) can be constructed which execute in sequence. The sequence of diagrams are indicated by the respective numbers in the respective sequence diagrams. When the first diagram (indicated by the number 0) in this sequence completes its execution, the next one begins. The process is repeated until all diagrams in the sequence have been executed.
Each diagram in the sequence uses a subset of incoming signal paths and produces a subset of outgoing signal paths (the outgoing subsets must be mutually exclusive, but the incoming subsets are arbitrary). Constants may be used with any of the diagrams without any constraints. Sequence variables indicated by rectangular boxes attached to the inside edge of the sequence structure (not shown in FIG. 12A) can be used multiple times in the diagrams following the diagram where the variable was assigned.
In accordance with data-flow principles used in the preferred embodiments of the present invention, the sequence structure does not begin execution until all incoming signal paths have data available, and none of the outgoing signal paths produce data until all diagrams have completed execution.
FIG. 13 shows an illustrative block diagram 70 of a sequence structure. The sequence structure is coupled to receive input signals on respective lines 72 and 74 and to provide respective output signals on respective lines 76, 78, and 80. Input registers 82 and 84 are provided to collect input data. A decoder 86 is provided to determine which computation and/or control element 88, 90, or 92 to select, and a sequence counter 94 is included to undertake a count for sequencing between respective elements 88, 90, and 92. When all data inputs are present, an output of AND gate 96 becomes TRUE. This starts computation in computation and/or control element 88 (assuming that it is the first element selected). When the control element 88 has completed computation, its output is stored in register 98. When the first element 88 has completed computation, the sequence counter 94 is free to advance by one. The decoder 86 will select the second computation element 90. The output of AND gate 96 will become TRUE again and, computation will begin in the second element 90. the output of the second element 90. The output of the second element 90 will be stored in output register 100. The sequence repeats for the third element 92, and its output is stored in output register 102. After the completion of the computation by the third element 92, the output data from all computations will be available for further computation by other instruments (not shown) of a block diagram system as will be explained more fully below.
Iterative (For) Loop Structure
The iterative loop structure, a graphical representation of which is shown in FIG. 12B is similar to the sequence structure in that the iterative loop structure partitions the data-flow graph into two parts. The interior diagram contains the body of the loop. Signal paths crossing the border of an iteration loop structure typically have a transformation applied. Incoming data are indexed in the most significant dimension so that the data inside the structure have dimensionality one less than outside. Outgoing data has the inverse transformation performed. The iterative loop structure is similar in operation to a for-next loop in a text-based program.
It is possible to disable the indexing on a signal path, in which case, the data behaves as if it were a constant available to each iteration. If indexing is disabled on an outgoing signal path, the data value is repeatedly overwritten and only the last value propagates out from the iteration structure.
There are two special variables which behave as constants within the body of the iterative loop structure: the number of iterations, N, and the iteration number or index, i. Usually, the number of iterations to be executed is automatically set by the size of the dimension being indexed for an incoming signal path (or the minimum of the indexed dimension sizes of all the incoming signal paths if there are more than one). In the event that there are no incoming signal paths, a scalar value must be specifically connected to the variable to specify the number of iterations. The iteration number, i, is similar to a constant within the diagram except that its value is 0 for the first iteration and increments by 1 at the end of each iteration.
Iteration Structures that have no data dependencies can, in principle, be executed in any order or completely in parallel except in the case where a non-reentrant virtual instrument is used by more than one structure.
An example of a non-reentrant virtual instrument is a VI which controls an instrument or data acquisition card. In that case, the iteration structures would be executed strictly sequentially, in accordance with data flow principles. All inputs must be available to start execution of an iteration loop. Furthermore, all outputs are generated after execution completes.
Referring to the illustrative drawings of FIG. 14, there is shown a block diagram 104 for an iterative loop. An iterative loop structure operates on data in an array one element at a time. The data for each element are sequentially stored in respective input buffers 106 and 108. A counter 110 begins its count at 0. When the first data elements are available for both inputs of both respective input buffers 106 and 108, computation and/or control element 112 will generate outputs to be stored in respective output buffers 114 and 116. At that time, the counter 110 will advance to 1, and the process will repeat for the second data element in the array. This process will repeat until the counter 110 reaches N-1 making a total of N computations. At that time a complete cycle signal will be generated by the comparator 118. The output signals stored in the respective output buffers 114 and 116 then will be available for use by other computation instruments (not shown).
Conditional Structure
The conditional structure, a graphical representation of which is shown in FIG. 12C, is similar in appearance to the sequence structure in its use of screen space, but it differs in its handling of signal paths crossing its border in that in each case a diagram may use any subset of incoming signal paths, but must produce all outgoing signal paths. In accordance with data-flow principles, all inputs must be available in order to start execution. Furthermore, all outputs are generated after execution is completed. The conditional structure is similar in operation to a case or switch statement used in certain text-based programming environments.
There must be a signal path that terminates at the case-selection terminal on the structure border. In the simplest case, a Boolean-valued scalar is connected to the selector to select between case FALSE and case TRUE. In the general case, a scalar number is connected to the selector to select among diagram case 0, case 1, etc.
The drawings of FIG. 15 illustrate a block diagram 120 corresponding to a conditional structure. The block diagram 120 for the conditional structure is substantially similar to that of the block diagram 70 for the sequence structure. The block diagram 120 for the conditional structure includes respective input registers 122 and 124, a decoder 126, an AND gate 128, three respective computation and/or control elements 120,132, and 134 and three respective output registers 136, 138, and 140 all coupled as shown in the drawings of FIG. 15. In operation, the conditional structure block diagram 120 operates in a manner substantially similar to that of the sequence structure block diagram 70, except that the decoder 126 of block diagram 120 is directly controlled by the case selection input provided on line 142 to select only one diagram.
Indefinite (While) Loop Stucture
The indefinite loop structure, a graphical representation of which is shown in FIG. 12D, is similar in concept to the iterative loop structure in that the interior of the structure diagram represents the body of the loop, but it differs in that signal paths crossing the border of the indefinite loop structure do not usually have an indexing transformation applied. The indefinite loop structure is similar to a do-while loop in text-based programming languages.
There are two special variables applied within the body of the indefinite loop structure: iteration number or index, i, and continuation flag. The iteration number starts at zero and increments by one at the end of each iteration. A boolean value or expression is connected to the continuation flag. A value of TRUE means that another iteration will be performed. If the continuation flag is left unconnected, it is equivalent to connecting a FALSE constant. In accordance with data-flow principles applied in the preferred embodiments, all inputs must be available in order to start execution. Furthermore, outputs are generated after execution is complete.
The illustrative drawing of FIG. 16 shows a block diagram 144 which corresponds to the graphical representation of an indefinite loop structure shown in FIG. 11. In operation, when data inputs are available on both respective input registers 145 and 148, an output of AND gate 150 will become TRUE to enable computation and/or control element 152. After computation is complete, output data are stored in respective output registers 154 and 156. After completion of the first loop, counter 158 increments, and the cycle begins again. This process continues until a continuation flag provided on line 160 goes FALSE. The output data are present after each cycle.
Shift Register
A special construction available for use only within the respective loop structures is the shift register. A graphical representation of each respective loop structure type incorporating a shift register is shown in FIG. 12E. The shift register eliminates the need for cycles in a data-flow graph, making the result easier to comprehend and to prove correct. The shift register behaves as if it were an ordered set of two or more variables, all of the same type and dimensionality.
The first variable in a set is an output of the loop-body diagram and is located on the right border of the loop structure. The other variables of the set are inputs to the loop-body diagram and are located on the left border of the structure at the same elevation.
At the conclusion of each loop iteration, the data from the shift register output variable are shifted into the first input variable, and the previous value of the first input variable is shifted into the second input variable.
The drawing of FIG. 17 shows an illustrative block diagram 162 illustrating operation of an iterative loop structure including a shift register. Respective latches 164 and 166 are provided to implement the shift register. In operation, the block diagram 162 of FIG. 17 (which represents an iterative loop structure with a shift register) operates similarly to the block diagram 104 of FIG. 14 (which represents an iterative loop structure minus a shift register) except that computation inputs are provided which give the system feedback from a previous cycle.
An output provided by loop counter 168 is sensed by the comparator 170. For the first loop, the multiplexor control 172 selects preselect inputs from respective preset gates 174 and 176. For all other cycles, respective latches 164 and 166 are selected. The selected input is fed into the computation and/or control element 178. data from input buffer 180 also is fed into the computation element 178. After each cycle, the computed output data are fed into respective output buffers 182 and 184. When the comparator 170 reaches N-1, the process is completed, and the output data can be passed to a next instrument (not shown).
Type Descriptors
The system and method according to the preferred embodiment uses type descriptors to describe the contents of clusters and arrays. A type descriptor is essentially a language or grammar for describing data types used in the preferred embodiment. Referring now to FIG. 18, a diagram illustrating a type descriptor for a cluster containing an integer, a string, a character, and a float is shown. The block diagram editor encodes this cluster in the following manner. The first three elements in the type descriptor are a size word representing the size of the cluster, 22 bytes in this example; a word containing the number 50 representing a cluster code; and a word containing 4 for the number of elements within the cluster. The next word contains the number 4 representing the size of the first element of the cluster in bytes followed by the code of the first element of the cluster, an integer, which is encoded as a 3. The next element in the cluster also has a size of 4 bytes and it is a type string, which is encoded as a 30. Thus the next element is encoded as 4, 30. The third element has a size of 4 and is a character, so it is encoded as a 4,1. The last element has a size of 4 and is encoded as a 10. Therefore, in summary, the type descriptor includes elements for size, data type code, and number of elements, as well as a size and code for each of the elements in the data structure.
Construction of an Exemplary Block Diagram
FIGS. 19A-K illustrate computer screen displays during each successive step in a construction of an exemplary block diagram using the block diagram editor 30 such as that of FIGS. 2 or 4. In FIGS. 19A-D, the front panel window appears on the left and the block diagram window appears on the right.
More particularly, in FIG. 19A, a control knob is placed in the front panel, and its associated terminal automatically appears in the block diagram. Referring to FIG. 20A, the system representation shows the virtual instrument with a diagram containing a self reference node, and a terminal in the self reference node which references the front panel control.
In FIG. 19B, a control graph indicator type is placed in the front panel, and its associated terminal automatically appears in the block diagram in the same position relative to the other terminal as the graph is to the knob. This makes it possible to distinguish the terminal even without supplementing the graphics with text labels.
In FIG. 19C, a constant with value 20 is placed in the block diagram. As shown in FIG. 20B, this is reflected in the system representation by another terminal and control attached to the self reference node.
In FIG. 19D, an icon referring to a built-in virtual instrument is placed in the block diagram. (An alternative view of the block diagram could show the icon terminals instead of the icon itself). As shown in FIG. 20C the system representation shows another node of instrument use type in the virtual instrument diagram and three terminals and controls corresponding to the terminals and controls in the referenced virtual instrument.
In FIG. 19E, an iterative loop structure is placed in the block diagram. As shown in FIG. 21A, the system representation shows the structure node in the diagram along with terminals and controls for the loop variables. Note that the iteration number is accessible only from within the loop; while the iteration limit is available inside and outside the loop as evidenced by the two terminals which reference it, one in the structure node and the other in the self-reference node of the diagram within the structure node.
In FIG. 19F, an icon referencing another built-in virtual instrument is placed inside the iterative loop structure.
In FIG. 19G, a wire is connected from the terminal associated with the front panel knob to the loop limit terminal of the loop structure. The front panel knob terminal is determined to be the signal source.
In FIG. 19H, a wire is connected from the iteration number terminal to a terminal on the virtual instrument inside the loop. This signal path lies completely within the loop structure subdiagram. As shown in FIG. 21B, the system representation shows the signal path with the iteration number terminal and the terminal on the instrument use node. The iteration number terminal is determined to be the signal source.
In FIG. 19I, the constant is wired to a terminal of the virtual instrument within the loop. In this case, the wire crosses the structure border so that a pair of terminals and a control are created, and the wire is split into two signal paths, one outside the loop structure and one inside. The constant is determined to be the source terminal of the outside signal, and the inside terminal at the border is determined to be the source of the inside signal.
In FIG. 19J, a wire is drawn from the virtual instrument inside the loop to the virtual instrument outside the loop. This wire crosses the border so it is split into two signal paths. The wire on the outside is thicker because it represents an array signal path (as will be explained more fully below).
In FIG. 19K, the output of the virtual instrument outside the loop is connected to the terminal associated with the front panel graph. The wire pattern indicates that it represents a cluster signal path (as will be explained more fully below).
Block Diagram of FIG. 5A
FIG. 22 shows a drawing of a computer-generated display of a completed block diagram for the design example of FIG. 5A. This block diagram is the graphical program representing the instrument's operation, showing the interconnections between the elements of the instrument, the signal paths, and the relationship to other virtual instruments. The large rectangular region in the center of the diagram is an iteration loop structure. The diagram placed inside this region is executed multiple times: for i=0 to N-1. At the upper left of the diagram, four front panel inputs from controls are shown connected to the iteration loop. The inputs to the iteration loop are the Number of Steps, High and Low Frequencies, and Amplitude.
The Number of Steps and High and Low Frequency inputs are connected to a Formula Node icon called "Calculate Frequency," which is comprised within the iteration loop. This icon is a built-in function which in this example includes a formula that calculates a frequency.
The Number of Steps input is connected to the loop-count (the N at the upper left corner) of the iteration loop, which in turn, is connected to the variable N in the Formula Node. The index i of the iteration loop is connected to the variable i of the Formula Node. The High and Low Frequency inputs are connected to the Fh and Fl inputs of the Formula Node.
Two virtual instrument icons referred to as Tek and Fluke are also inside the iteration loop. The Tek VI takes as input Amplitude and the frequency Fi output from the Formula Node and performs the appropriate IEEE-488 operations to set the function generator 208 of FIG. 5A. The Fluke VI performs the appropriate IEEE-488 operations to obtain a voltage measurement from the multimeter 210 of FIG. 5A. These two icons represent simple virtual instruments that are easily designed using built-in high level IEEE-488 functions to communicate with the multimeter 210. The output from the multimeter (Fluke) icon is provided to logic nodes which convert from the RMS (root-mean square) value. This signal is output from the iteration loop and provided to nodes which convert the data to dB (decibel) form. This output is then provided to a bundle node which also receives the output from the Formula Node. The bundle node is a bundle by position node and acts to bundle the two arrays of data it receives, i.e., frequency and response for plotting purposes. This bundled data in then provided to an indicator on the front panel.
Each iteration of the iteration loop produces as output the input frequency and the corresponding voltage measurement. This results in two arrays of values which exit the loop at the right. The bundle function converts these two arrays into X, Y plots which are then provided to the front panel graph indicator. Note the self-documenting effect of the graphical language, with the iteration loop structure contributing to the readability of the program.
With the front panel and block diagram complete, the instrument is ready to be used. The instrument is operated from the front panel. To execute the instrument, the user simply configures the input controls and "clicks" the Run Arrow button on the top of the screen (as will be appreciated from the description below).
VI Execution Overview
The graphical system and method described above permits the computer-aided modeling of a process using graphical techniques which generally are more easily comprehended, especially by persons who do not possess specialized skills in computer programming techniques. The use of a computer-generated image of a front panel display permits a user to easily understand how data is provided to a system being modeled and how data is provided by the system. The block diagram editor permits a user to construct a graphical representation of a procedure for producing output data from input data using icons which reference modularized procedural units. A user may use the icon editor to construct his own icons; or he may call upon a ready-made library of icons. The execution subunit executes execution instructions which are constructed in response to the graphical images produced by a user to model a process. Thus, a user can program a computer substantially by constructing a hierarchy of icons connected to one another so as to model a process. A user, therefore, can use the system and method of the present invention to program a computer to model a process using graphical techniques which generally are easier to comprehend.
Furthermore, the system and method of the present invention advantageously can use data flow techniques. The use of the structures illustrated in FIGS. 12A-E facilitates the use of such data flow techniques. By using such techniques, a system modelled in block diagram form can operate in a parallel fashion, since each individual icon in a hierarchy comprising such a block diagram operates as soon as all input data provided to it are available. In addition, such structures render graphical representations of block diagrams using such data flow techniques more comprehensible to a user, and, therefore, simplify the task of using such techniques.
Parallel and Serial VI Execution
Having described how a VI is constructed and used, additional explanation regarding the execution description is provided. In the preferred embodiment, all VIs are referred to as diagram VIs. Diagram VIs in turn are comprised of nodes, which are discussed with regard to FIGS. 9C-9K Referring once again to FIG. 8B, a node (icon or structure) begins execution when all its inputs are available. If a diagram has two or more icons referring to the same VI and a second one has all its inputs available before the first finishes execution, it is not always clear how to handle this second node. In fact, it depends on the "execution mode" of the VI. Absent some way to execute VIs in parallel, VIs would be executed in serial. In a serial mode of execution, the second node is placed on a FIFO wait queue of the self-reference node associated with the VI, and execution of the VI in the context of the second node is delayed until the execution in the context of the first node is completed.
Parallel or reentrant execution dynamically creates multiple instances of the VI at execution time in order to allow multiple nodes to execute in parallel. In the preferred embodiment, parallel execution is implemented for VIs designated as reentrant by the user.
FIGS. 23 and 25 illustrate serial and parallel execution modes. In FIG. 23, one "thermometer" icon must wait until the other finishes execution before it can start, even though it has all its inputs at the same time as the other. This is because the "thermometer" VI is a serial VI.
In FIG. 24, the asynchronous behavior of the wait VI (the watch icon)is shown. It is a code type VI that does not execute atomically. During the time that it is executing (waiting) other components of the diagram may execute.
In FIG. 25, both "wait" icons execute at the same time showing the parallel execution mode of the wait VI. If execution were not parallel either the "thermometer" VI or the "IMD/THD" VI would effectively wait for the sum of the time delay intervals caused by the two "wait" VIs together.
The preferred embodiment can be embodied in software, hardware, or a combination of both. One way to implement a parallel VI in hardware is to have enough instances of the hardware to account for the maximum number of VI instances that must run in parallel.
The present invention provides the ability of a virtual instrument (with icon, front panel, and diagram or code) to be a template and effectively automatically replicate itself as necessary in order to allow multiple instances to run in parallel.
A node is executed when all its inputs have data ready. When this happens the node is put on a list of ready nodes, i.e., is placed on the run queue. This is illustrated in FIG. 26. One by one the ready nodes are taken off the list and executed. When more than one of the ready nodes are I-use nodes which refer to the same virtual instrument the scheduling of the execution depends on the mode of the virtual instrument. The possible modes are serial and parallel.
Serial Mode (Block Diagram Virtual Instruments)
Serial mode instruments place contending nodes on a list of nodes which execute the block diagram of the virtual instrument in turn. This list of nodes is the self-reference node wait queue. Because the block diagram of an instrument consists of more nodes which will become ready, the execution of the block diagram instrument is not atomic. The nodes of the diagram are put onto the ready node list or run queue as they become ready and are "interleaved" with ready nodes from other diagrams. This is illustrated in FIG. 27. The dashed box 318 once again contains the node on whose behalf the block diagram 322 of the virtual instrument is executing. The node 324 outside the dashed box must wait for the diagram to complete before it gets its turn. The arrow from the block diagram to the Ready Nodes list 326 shows that the block diagram 322 will produce more ready nodes which will be added to this list.
Parallel Mode (Block Diagram Virtual Instruments)
Block diagram instruments can be built to execute in parallel or reentrant mode. The means of making parallel execution possible for block diagram instruments is by using the instrument as a template to make identical copies of the instrument automatically as needed for contending nodes. Each block diagram then executes, producing ready nodes for the Ready Nodes list or run queue in such a way that the nodes can be "interleaved" and the execution of the identical diagrams takes place "at the same time." This is illustrated in FIG. 28. Inside the dashed box 338 the replicated virtual instrument 340,342 is shown and each I-use node has "its own copy" of the instrument. Both diagrams are shown putting ready nodes onto the Ready Nodes 334 list.
Execution States
The fundamental capability which execution states permit is the interactive operation of more than one virtual instrument at a time, as well as the construction or editing of some virtual instruments while others are executing.
When a VI is interactively started (i.e., run from its front panel) it enters its active state. It remains active until it completes, at which time it returns to its idle state. At the point it becomes active all lower level VIs are "reserved." This prevents them from being changed (a change could result in an execution error). A reserved VI executes in the context of one or more icon nodes within the diagrams of one or more higher level VIs. It is unreserved when all those higher level VIs become idle.
Reserved VIs can have their front panel and block diagram windows open while they execute. This ability to observe VIs at any and all levels of the hierarchy while they execute is a powerful troubleshooting aid. While a VI is reserved it may not be edited; however the values assigned to its front panel controls may be changed. Depending on the design of the VI and the point in time when the control value is changed such a change may produce unexpected results.
A "breakpoint" may be set so that a reserved VI enters its "suspended" state when it is about to execute. "Suspended" is similar to idle in that the VI can be run interactively one or more times. However, a suspended VI can be resumed (passing its outputs back to the icon node) and reenter its reserved state. It can actually be resumed without running it at all. While it is suspended its indicators (outputs) can be modified as well as its controls (inputs). This capability enables top-down implementation and testing. "Stub" VIs can be built (icons and front panels but no diagram or code), and their execution simulated by setting the breakpoint, supplying relevant outputs when the VI becomes suspended, and then resuming.
Breakpoints have been used in conventional programming languages, but there is no analogy in instrumentation systems. A related but different analogy in instrumentation is remote/local loosely related to reserved/idle (no analogy to suspended). Stubs are known in programming but not in hardware or instrumentation development.
The present invention provides the ability of VIs to exist in different states in order to protect execution from editing changes. Furthermore, it provides the ability to change the value of a VI indicator (output) while it is in its suspended state.
Controls
As illustrated in FIG. 29, whenever a token is propagated to a control the control is set to its normal or error state depending on whether the value of the token is in or out of range for the control.
Signals
In FIG. 30, after a wiring change or a control type, dimension, direction, or unit change the type propagation code will set each signal to bad or normal. The VI is not executable unless all its signals are normal. When a diagram is about to be executed, all its signals are set to their armed state. When a signal is propagated from its source node it is set to its normal state. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed signals are set to their normal states.
Diagrams
In FIG. 31, when a diagram begins execution it is set to its active state. When it finishes it is set to its normal state. When the owning VI becomes idle all active diagrams are set to their normal states. The diagram state is needed only for reset to be able to identify the active diagram of a select or sequence structure.
Self Reference Nodes
In FIG. 32, when a diagram is about to be executed the self reference node as well as all the other nodes in the diagram are set to their armed states. When all the other nodes have finished executing the self reference node is scheduled to run by being placed on the run queue. At that point it is set to its fired state. When it is removed frame the run queue and executed, signalling the completion of the diagram, it is set to its normal state. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed self reference nodes are set to their normal states.
Structure Nodes
In FIG. 33, when a diagram is about to be executed all the nodes in the diagram are set to their armed states. When a node's short count is decremented to zero, it is scheduled to run by being placed on the run queue. At that point the node is set to its fired state. When it is removed from the run queue and begins execution it is set to its active state. When the subdiagrams finish (the required number of iterations) the structure node is set to its normal state and its outputs are propagated. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed structure nodes are set to their normal states.
Instrument Usagee Nodes
In FIG. 34, after a load operation or a change to the front panel of the sub VI the linking code will set the node to bad or normal (a node is bad also if the link is good but the sub VI is not executable). The owning VI is not executable unless all its nodes are normal. When a diagram is about to be executed all nodes are set to their armed states. When a node's short count is decremented to zero it is scheduled to run by being placed on the run queue. At that point the node is set to its fired state. When an instrument usage node is removed from the run queue and enqueued on the sub VI's self-reference node wait queue it is set to its pending state. When the sub VI actually begins execution in the context of the calling node the calling node is set to its active state. When the sub VI completes normally and the calling node is dequeued from the VI's ready queue the calling node is set to this normal state. If the referenced VI is stopped in its suspended state or executing in its retrying state the calling node is set to its suspended state. When the owning VI becomes idle all remaining armed nodes within it are set to their normal states.
Serial Virtual Instruments
In FIG. 35, after a block diagram edit operation the type propagation code sets the VI to its bad or normal state depending on the presence of bad signals or nodes (a serial VI is bad also if any sub VI is not executable, or if it or any sub VI contains a recursive reference to it). When the go button is hit the VI in the front window (panel or diagram) is set to its active state. At this point all of its subVIs and all of theirs, etc., are set to their reserved states. When the VI completes normally or with an error it is placed in its idle state. If the reset button is hit while the VI is in its active state it is placed in its idle state, and all nodes in their pending, active, or error states are reset (which may involve resetting their subVIs). When a VI enters its idle state from its active or reserved state each of its subVIs still in its reserved state checks all its callers to see if it too can return to its idle state.
When a reserved VI actually begins execution in the context of a calling node it is placed in its running state. Whenever a VI has to abort execution because its calling node is being reset it is placed in its reserved state (it may subsequently have the opportunity to discover whether it should return to its idle state).
If the VI has a breakpoint set or if it detects an error on a control then instead of being placed in its running state at the start of execution it is placed in its suspended state.
When a VI completes normally it is placed back in its reserved state. If a VI detects an error on an indicator the VI is placed in its suspended state. When the retry button is hit the VI is placed in the retrying state. If the VI then completes normally or with an error or if the reset button is hit it is placed in the suspended state. A suspended VI is placed in the reserved state when the resume button is hit.
Front panel controls can be adjusted in any VI state but the effects are nondeterministic except for the idle and suspended states. Edit changes to the front panel or block diagram are not allowed in any state except idle and bad. The go button is inoperative except in the idle state. The reset button is inoperative except in the active and retrying states. The resume and retry buttons are inoperative except in the suspended state.
While the VI is in its running, suspended, or retrying state, additional pending I-use nodes may be enqueued on its wait queue. When the current node is completed it is dequeued from the wait queue, the next one is set active, and the VI begins execution in its context.
Parallel Block Diagram Virtual Instruments
In FIG. 37, a parallel block diagram VI is similar to a serial VI except it has no suspended or retrying states. When a parallel VI actually begins execution in the context of a calling node a clone is created and placed in its running state. FIG. 36 illustrates a clone. When the clone completes normally it is discarded. The clone is discarded also whenever it has to abort execution because its calling node is being reset. If the VI has a breakpoint set then instead of placing the clone in its running state it is placed in its suspended state. The execution behavior of a VI clone is similar to that of a reserved serial VI.
              TABLE                                                       
______________________________________                                    
State and Indication and Transition Methods                               
Controls and indicators:                                                  
normal: normal image                                                      
error: gray indicator or red outline                                      
Signals:                                                                  
Bad: dashed                                                               
Normal: normal wire pattern and color                                     
Armed: normal width light gray line                                       
Nodes:                                                                    
Bad: Grayed out icon                                                      
Normal: Normal image                                                      
Armed: Grayed out icon                                                    
Fired: Normal image                                                       
Pending: Normal image                                                     
Active: Normal image                                                      
Error: Normal image                                                       
VIs:                                                                      
Bad: go button drawn broken                                               
Idle: go button normal                                                    
Active: reset button present                                              
Reserved: reserved indicator in place of go button                        
Running: running indicator in place of go button                          
Suspended: retry button in place of go button,                            
resume button present                                                     
Retrying: reset button present,                                           
resume button disabled                                                    
Error on VI Control: go button disabled                                   
Error on VI Indicator: resume button disabled                             
______________________________________                                    
FIG. 38 further explains execution states. In addition, the flowchart included as Appendix B in U.S. Pat. No. 4,914,568 explains FIG. 38 with regard to a prior embodiment and is incorporated herein by this reference.
Execution States
The fundamental capability which execution states provide is the interactive operation of more than one virtual instrument at a time, as well as the construction or editing of virtual instruments while others are executing.
The execution state diagram is shown in FIG. 39. State information is maintained internally for each virtual instrument. When the VI is in the front window, the state information for that VI is shown on the control palette by the one or two controls shown within each state in FIG. 39.
When the VI is interactively started (i.e., run from its front panel) it enters its active state. It remains active until it completes, at which time it returns to its idle state. At the point it becomes active, all lower level VIs are "reserved." This prevents them from being changed (a change could result in an execution error). A reserved VI executes in the context of one or more icon nodes within the diagrams of one or more higher level VIs. It is unreserved when all those higher level VIs become idle.
Reserved VIs can have their front panel and block diagram windows open while they execute. This ability to observe VIs at any and all levels of the hierarchy while they execute is a powerful trouble-shooting aid. While a VI is reserved it may not be edited; however the values assigned to its front panel controls may be changed. Depending on the design of the VI and the point in time when the control values is changed such a change may produce unexpected results.
FIGS. 40 and FIG. 41 show five VIs in various stages of execution. The purpose of this example is to show how the change in state in one VI may cause state changes in other VIs, both above and below in the hierarchy. Assume all VIs have been loaded and all are initially in the idle state. FIG. 41 shows the execution states of all of the VIs after VI 1 is interactively started. Notice the changes caused in the execution states of VI 1's subVIs, VI 2 and VI 3, which are now reserved. They may not be edited or executed interactively. Notice also the state of VI 4. It is in the bad VI state because a sub-VI is active. VI 4 may not be executed interactively, but editing is allowed. If VI 4 was allowed to be executed interactively, it would attempt to reserve VI 1, which is already active. There is no transition from active to reserved in the state diagram, so we must guarantee that a VI cannot become active if any of its subVIs are already active. VI 5 has not changed states. It may be edited or executed interactively. One of its subVIs is reserved, but that does not affect the state of VI 5.
Setting breakpoints is a useful debugging tool. Stopping on a breakpoint is implemented with execution states. A "breakpoint" may be set so that a reserved VI enters its "suspended" state when it is about to execute. Suspended is similar to idle in that the VI can be run interactively one or more times. However, a suspended VI can be resumed (passing its outputs back to the icon node) and reenter its reserved state. It can actually be resumed without running it at all. While it is suspended its indicators (outputs) can be modified as well as its controls (inputs). This capability enables top-down implementation and testing. "Stub" VIs can be built (icons and front panels but no diagram or code) and their execution simulated by setting the breakpoint, supplying relevant outputs when the VI becomes suspended, and then resuming.
Breakpoints are known in conventional programming languages, but there is no analogy in instrumentation systems. Stubs are prior art in programming but not in hardware or instrumentation development.
FIG. 40 shows the control palette execution state buttons corresponding to the VIs when VI 3 becomes suspended. A breakpoint was set on VI 3, and execution is suspended before it is executed. VII is still active, VI 2 is running, and VI 3 is suspended. The VI states of VI 4 and VI 5 do not change.
The system is protected from executing with an error on the block diagram (wiring error). If the VI is in the bad state, the VI may not be executed interactively, or programmatically by a higher level instrument. When a VI becomes bad, all of its callers are also bad because they now contain a bad sub VI. When a VI changes from bad to idle, all of its callers are notified of the state change and they must check to see if any of their subVIs are still bad. This guarantees that when a VI is interactively executed, it does not contain errors on the block diagram or any subVI block diagrams.
To protect execution from editing changes that may cause errors, editing is not allowed except in the idle or bad state. Since the system guarantees that there are no block diagram errors when the execution begins, and no editing is allowed during execution, no diagram errors will be encountered during execution.
The present invention provides the ability of VIs to exist in different states in order to protect execution from editing changes. Furthermore, the ability of VIs to have a breakpoint and suspended state enable top-down implementation (running a top level VI without having all the subVIs finished yet). Also, it provides the ability to change the value of a VI indicator (output) while it is in its suspended state.
Operation of the Graphical System
The graphical system and method for modeling a process are implemented in software. A copy of a program listing for one embodiment of the graphical system and method in which the present invention may be incorporated is filed as an Appendix to U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221 and is hereby incorporated by reference. The present invention is described further below beginning at FIG. 115. The following description explains certain embodiments of the operation of the graphical system and method in which the present invention may be incorporated. The explanation is intended to be illustrative and not exhaustive and uses specific examples to explain the principles of operation of the preferred embodiments. It will be appreciated that the principles of operation explained below will serve as a basis for the heuristic learning process necessary to fully appreciate and practice the full scope of the present invention. Thus, it is not intended that the scope and content of protection afforded to the present invention be limited in any way by the following explanation.
The following explanation explains how to use the implemented functions of the preferred embodiments. A brief review of virtual instruments (VIs) is provided first, followed by a walk through of the display menus. This presentation is followed by a general discussion of how VIs are created and executed.
Virtual Instruments
In instrumentation applications according to the preferred embodiment, graphical data flow programs are referred to as virtual instruments (VIs). As previously discussed VIs have three main parts: the front panel, the block diagram, and the icon/connector.
The front panel is the means of setting input values and viewing outputs from the VI block diagram. Because the front panel is analogous to a front panel of a real instrument, the inputs are called controls and the outputs are called indicators. However, the term "control" is also used in this specification to mean both controls and indicators for convenience. A variety of controls and indicators, such as knobs, switches, buttons, charts, graphs, and so on can be used to make the front panel easily identifiable and understandable. An example of the front panel for a Temperature VI is illustrated in FIG. 42.
Each front panel has an accompanying block diagram, which is the VI program. The block diagram is built using a graphical programming environment, and the block diagram can be thought of as source code in this environment. The components of the block diagram represent program nodes that are "wired" together to show the flow of data within the block diagram. The block diagram for the Temperature VI is shown in FIG. 43.
Referring now to FIG. 44, an icon connector is the means by which a VI is turned into an object that can be used in the block diagrams of other VIs as if it were a subroutine. The icon graphically represents the VI in the block diagram of other VIs. The connector terminals determine where the inputs and outputs on the icon must be wired. The terminals are analogous to parameters of a subroutine. They correspond to the controls and indicators on the front panel of the VI. FIG. 44 shows the icon and connector for the Temperature VI. The connector is usually hidden under the icon until the user chooses to view it.
A powerful feature of the preferred embodiment lies in the hierarchical nature of the VI. Once a VI is created, it can be used as a subVI in the block diagram of a higher-level VI. There is no limit on the number of layers in the hierarchy. As an example, the VI illustrated in FIGS. 45 and 46 uses the Temperature VI as a subVI in its block diagram. The front panel for this VI is shown in FIG. 45 and the block diagram is shown in FIG. 46. Referring to FIG. 45, the Temperature VI collects data, and then the top-level VI graphs the results. The user specifies the number of measurements and the delay between each measurement on the top-level VI front panel. The top-level VI block diagram illustrated in FIG. 46 shows the Temperature VI in a loop. The VI collects the measurement during each iteration of the loop. After the loop has executed a specified number of times, the VI passes the data to an icon that graphs it on the front panel of the top-level VI. Therefore, in the preferred embodiment, a VI can be used as a subVI. This makes block diagrams modular, and easy to debug, understand, and maintain.
Panel and Diagram Windows
When the graphical programming environment is begun by double-clicking on its icon, a new, untitled Panel window appears. The Panel window displays the VI front panel and is one of the two windows used to build a VI in the preferred embodiment. The other window, the Diagram window, contains the block diagram.
Front panels and block diagrams comprise collections of graphical objects which represent programming elements. Front panels contain various types of controls and indicators. Block diagrams contain terminals corresponding to front panel controls and indicators, as well as constants, functions, subVIs, structures, and wires that carry data from one object to another. FIG. 47 shows a front panel and its associated block diagram.
Panel Palette
Both the Panel and Diagram windows contain a palette of command buttons and status indicators that are used for controlling the VI. One of two palettes is available depending on whether the user is operating in run or edit mode. The palette illustrated in FIG. 48 appears at the top of the window when the VI is in run mode. This panel includes, from left to right, icons referred to as the Run button, the Mode button, the Continuous Run button, the Breakpoint button, the Step Mode button, the Execution Highlighting button, the Print Mode button, and the Datalogging button.
1. Run Mode
The user clicks on the Run button (FIG. 49A) to run the VI. While the VI is executing, the button changes to alternate appearances as shown in FIG. 49B depending on whether the VI is a top-level VI or one of the VI callers is running at the top level. While the VI is executing, the Stop button appears as illustrated in FIG. 49C. The user clicks on this button if it is necessary to halt the VI immediately. However, it is noted that the user should avoid using the Stop button to terminate a VI. The user preferably should either let the VI execute to completion or design a method to stop the VI gracefully. For example, placing a switch on the front panel to stop the VI is one method. If a VI contains an error, an icon referred to as the Broken Run button shown in FIG. 49D replaces the Run button and indicates that the VI cannot compile due to errors. To find out why, the user can click on this button and a pop-up window will list all errors.
The Mode button switches operation of the block diagram editor between run mode and edit mode. In run mode, the user can execute but not edit a VI. In edit mode, the user can create and change a VI. Thus the button appears differently depending on whether the program is in run mode (FIG. 50A) or edit mode (FIG. 50B).
If the user desires to run the VI from the edit mode without setting other options in the run mode palette, the user clicks on the run arrow (FIG. 49A). If necessary, the execution subsystem compiles the VI first, then switches to run mode, runs the VI, and returns to edit mode after the VI has run.
The user clicks on the Continuous Run button (FIG. 51A) to execute the VI repeatedly. While in the continuous run mode, the symbol changes to where the two arrows are darkened as shown in FIG. 51B. The user clicks on this button to disable continuous running.
The user clicks on the Breakpoint button (FIG. 52A) to set a breakpoint in the VI. The button changes its appearance (FIG. 52B) to indicate when a breakpoint is set.
The user clicks on the Step Mode button (FIG. 53A) to enable single-step mode. When in the single-step mode, the button changes appearance as indicated in FIG. 53B, and the Step button (FIG. 53C) appears besides it. The user clicks on the Step button to single-step through the VI.
The user clicks on the Execution ttighlighting button (FIG. 54A) to enable execution highlighting. In this mode, the button changes its appearance to that illustrated in FIG. 54B, and the flow of data can be viewed through the block diagram. Execution highlighting is commonly used with single-step mode discussed above to trace the flow of data in the block diagram.
The user clicks on the Print Mode button (FIG. 55A) to automatically print the front panel after the VI finishes executing and the VI has updated the indicators with new values. The symbol changes to indicate that the print mode is activated as illustrated in FIG. 55B.
The user clicks on the Datalogging button (FIG. 56A) to log all front panel control and indicator data to the separate log file when the VI executes. As shown in FIG. 56B, the button changes to indicate when data logging is active, and a complementary button (FIG. 56C) indicates that data is logged in a log file.
2. Edit Mode
In edit mode, the user has access to the palette illustrated in FIG. 57 and VIs can be created and modified. Along with the Run and Mode buttons, this palette contains the tools needed to build and operate VIs. These tools include from left to right the Operating tool, Positioning tool, Labeling tool, Wiring tool, and Coloring tool. After a tool is selected from the menu, the mouse cursor takes its shape.
The Operating tool (FIG. 58A) is used to manipulate front panel controls and indicators. As shown in FIG. 58B, the tool changes when it passes over a text-based control such as a digital or string control.
The Positioning tool (FIG. 59A) is used to select, move, or resize objects. The tool changes form when it passes over a corner of a resizable object, as illustrated in FIG. 59B and 59C.
The Labeling tool appears as shown in FIG. 60B and is used to enter text into labels or create free labels. The tool changes to the form illustrated in FIG. 60C when the user creates free labels.
The Wiring tool (FIG. 61 ) is used to wire objects together on the block diagram.
The Coloring tool (FIG. 62) is used to color an object. FIG. 62B shows the alternate form of the coloring tool when the user wishes to set the color of the tool from the object.
When any tool is placed over a subVI or function icon, information pertaining to the particular subVI or function is displayed in the Help Window. It is noted that the user must first select Show Help Window from the Windows menu to do so.
Pop-Up Menus
The menu used most often in the preferred embodiment is the pop-up menu. Nearly all the objects required to build VIs require pop-up menus for selection and modification. The action of accessing a pop-up menu is known as "popping-up."
Pull-Down Menus
The menu bar at the top of the screen illustrated in FIG. 63 contains several pull-down menus. The pull-down menus contain options common to most applications, such as Open, Save, Copy, and Paste, as well as many others. FIG. 63 shows the menu bar when the Panel window is active. As shown in FIG. 70 the Functions menu replaces the Controls menu when the Diagram window is active.
1. File Menu
Referring now to FIG. 64, options in the File menu are used primarily to open, close, save, and print VIs.
The New option creates a new VI and opens its panel.
The Open . . . option opens an existing Vt.
The Close option closes the active window.
The Save option saves the current VI.
The Save As . . . option saves the current VI under a new name.
The Save A Copy As . . . option saves a copy of the current VI under a new name.
The Save with Options . . . option allows options for saving VIs without hierarchy and/or block diagrams.
The Revert . . . option reverts the current VI to the last saved version.
The Page Setup . . . option sets configuration options for the printer.
The Page Layout . . . option sets options for printing the VI.
The Print Preview . . . option displays selected VI components as they appear when printed.
The Print . . . option prints selected components of the current VI.
The Data Logging option displays data logging options.
The Get Info . . . option displays a dialog box containing information on the current VI.
The Edit VI Library . . . option removes VIs in a library or rearranges VI palette order.
The Mass Compile . . . option compiles all VIs in a library.
The Import Picture . . . option imports graphics files.
The Build Application . . . option builds a stand-alone application using Application Builder (optional).
The Quit or Exit option quits operation.
2. Edit Menu
As shown in FIG. 65 the options in the Edit menu are used to build the front panel and block diagram of a VI.
The UNDO option restores the current VI to its state immediately prior to the last editing step (currently not implemented).
The Cut option removes the selected object and places it on the Clipboard.
The Copy option copies the selected object and places it on the Clipboard.
The Paste option places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the active window.
The Clear option deletes the selected object.
The Remove Bad Wires option deletes all faulty wiring connections.
The Panel Order . . . option changes the order number for front panel objects interactively.
The Edit Control . . . option invokes the Control Editor.
The Alignment option aligns selected items using a selected Alignment axis.
The Align option aligns the selected items by the current Alignment setting.
The Distribution option distributes selected items using a selected Distribution setting.
The Distribute option spaces the selected items by the current Distribution setting.
The Move Forward option moves selected item one position higher in the stack.
The Move Backward option moves the selected item one position lower in the stack.
The Move to Front option moves the selected item to the top of the stack.
The Move to Back option moves the selected item to the bottom the stack.
The Preferences . . . option sets preferences for memory, disk, and display.
The Move Forward, Move Backwared, Move to Front, and Move to Back options are useful when multiple objects are "stacked up" so that they overlap. This is a useful feature for creating certain visual effects on the front panel.
3. Operate Menu
As shown in FIG. 66 the commands in the Operate menu are used to execute the VI.
The Run option executes the current VI.
The Stop option stops execution of the current VI.
The Change to Run Mode option toggles between Run mode and Edit mode. (In run mode the menu item reads "Change to Edit Mode")
The Make Current Values Default option makes current values the default on all controls and indicators.
The Reinitialize All to Default option sets all controls and indicators to their default values.
4. Controls Menu
Referring now to FIG. 67 controls and indicators are added to the front panel via the Controls menu. Each option in the menu displays a palette of available controls and indicators for that selection. The Controls menu is available only when the Panel window is active.
The Numeric option displays controls and indicators for numeric data.
The Boolean option displays controls and indicators for Boolean values.
The String option displays controls and indicators for ASCII character strings.
The Array & Cluster option displays controls and indicators that group sets of data types.
The Graph option displays indicators that plot numeric data in graph or real time chart form.
The Path & RefNum option displays controls for file paths and refnums.
The Decoration option displays graphical objects that enhance the panel display.
The Control . . . option displays a dialog box to load custom controls.
The Picture option displays indicators for drawing graphical objects.
5. Windows Menu
Referring now to FIG. 68 the Windows menu is used to locate opened windows quickly and to open windows of subVIs and calling VIs.
The Show Diagram option makes the diagram window active. (When the diagram is active, the menu item reads "Show Panel")
The Show Help Window displays the help window for block diagram function and VIs. (When the Help Window is visible the menu item reads "Hide Help Window")
The Show Clipboard option displays the contents of the clipboard. (if clipboard visible then "hide ")
The Tile option displays the front panel and block diagram of a VI side by side.
The Full Size option uses the entire screen to display the active window.
The About LabVIEW . . . option displays a dialog box with the LabVIEW version number. The preferred embodiment of the graphical dataflow programming environment is marketed under the trademark LabVIEW®.
The Show VI Hierarchy option graphically displays the calling hierarchy of all VIs in memory. (if hierarchy window visible, menu reads "hide hierarchy window")
The This VI's Callers and the This VI's Callees options displays a palette of VIs that call the current VI and a palette of subVIs of the current VI, respectively.
The Unopened SubVIs option displays a palette of subVIs that are unopened,
The Unopened Type Defs option . . . allows the user to open a file containing the original of a type definition. For more information please see related U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/125,459, titled "Method and Apparatus for Providing Improved Type Compatibility Checking Data Structure Variable Referencing in a Graphical Data Flow Program," filed Sep. 22, 1993, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
At the bottom of the Windows menu, all the Panel and Diagram windows currently open are listed. A check mark indicates an active window.
6. Text Menu
Referring now to FIG. 69, the Text menu is used to change the font, style, and color of text.
The Apply Font option displays options to let the user choose from predefined font styles.
The Font option displays available fonts.
The Size option displays font sizes.
The Style option displays font styles such as plain, bold, italic, and underline.
The Justify option displays options to justify text such as left, center, and right.
The Color option displays a color palette to color text.
As shown in FIG. 70, when the Diagram window is active, the Functions menu illustrated in FIG. 71 replaces the Controls menu from the Panel window menu bar. All other menu selections are identical.
7. Functions Menu
The user builds the block diagram with the Functions menu. Each option in the menu displays a palette of available icons for that option. As mentioned above, the Functions menu is only available when the Diagram window is active.
The Structs & Constants option displays program control structures, such as For Loops and constants.
The Arithmetic option displays arithmetic and logical functions.
The Trig & Log option displays trigonometric and logarithmic functions.
The Comparison option displays functions to compare numbers, Booleans, or strings.
The Conversion option displays functions to convert from one data type to another.
The String option displays functions to manipulate strings.
The Array & Cluster option displays function to process arrays and graph data.
The File I/O option displays functions for reading and writing files.
The Dialog & Date/Time option displays functions for operator dialog, timing, and time/date acquisition.
The Miscellaneous option displays miscellaneous functions.
The VI . . . option invokes the Select File dialog box, from which you can select any VI.
The Analysis option displays analysis VIs.
The DAQ option displays data acquisition VIs (for plug-in data acquisition boards).
The GPIB option displays VIs for controlling the GPIB interface.
The Basics Course option displays VIs used in the Basic training course manual.
The Network option displays VIs for communicating over a network.
The Picture option displays VIs for creating pictures.
The Serial option displays Vls for controlling a serial port.
The Tutorial option displays VIs used in the tutuorial manual.
The Utility option displays utility VIs.
Creating a VI
VIs have three main pans: the front panel, the block diagram, and the icon/connector. The front panel and the block diagram are discussed here, and the icon/connector is discussed below.
Front Panel
The front panel of a VI is built with a combination of controls and indicators. Controls are the means of supplying data to the VI. Indicators display data that the VI generates. There are several types of controls and indicators. These include numeric, Boolean (True-False), string, array and cluster, and graph. Controls and indicators are added to the front panel through the Controls menu.
"Popping up" is the preferred method for placing objects on the Panel and Diagram windows. If a free area in the Panel window is popped up on, the Controls menu is accessed. Similarly, if a free area in the Diagram window is popped up on, the Functions menu is accessed. This method is not only quicker than moving the cursor to the panel palette, but the selected item will appear where the cursor is positioned instead of at the center of the window.
Numeric Controls and Indicators
Numeric controls are used to enter numeric quantities, while numeric indicators display numeric quantities. The two most commonly used numeric objects are the digital control and the digital indicator illustrated in FIG. 72.
Boolean Controls and Indicators
Boolean controls and indicators are used to enter and display Boolean (True-False) values. Boolean objects simulate switches, buttons, and LEDs. The most commonly used Boolean objects are the vertical switch and the round LED illustrated in FIG. 73.
Configuring Controls and Indicators
Nearly all of the controls and indicators can be configured using options from their pop-up menus. Popping up on individual components of controls and indicators displays menus for customizing those components. This method is illustrated in FIG. 74 for a digital control.
Block Diagram
As illustrated in FIG. 75, the block diagram is composed of nodes, terminals, and wires. Nodes are program execution elements and nodes are analogous to statements, functions, and subroutines in conventional, text-based programming languages. There are four node types--functions or primitives, subVI nodes, structures, and Code Interface Nodes (CINs). Functions are the built-in nodes for performing elementary operations such as adding numbers, file I/O, or string formatting. SubVI nodes are VIs that are designed by the user and later called from the diagram of another VI. Structures such as For Loops and While Loops control the flow of the program. CINs are interfaces between the block diagram and user-supplied code written in a text-based programming language. FIG. 75 shows a VI that has two function nodes, one that adds two numbers and one that subtracts them.
Terminals are ports through which data passes between the block diagram and the front panel and between nodes of the block diagram. Terminals are analogous to parameters and constants. There are two types of terminals--control or indicator terminals and node terminals. Control and indicator terminals belong to front panel controls and indicators. The values that an operator or a calling VI enters into these controls pass to the block diagram through these terminals when the VI executes. When the VI finishes executing, the output data passes from the block diagram to the front panel through the indicator terminals. Control and indicator terminals are automatically created or deleted when a front panel control or indicator is created or deleted. The block diagram of the example VI in FIG. 75 shows terminals belonging to four front panel controls and indicators. Like VIs, the Add and Subtract functions also have node terminals which underlie the icon. The terminal pattern for the Add function and the Subtract function is also illustrated in FIG. 75.
Wires are data paths between terminals and are analogous to variables in conventional languages. Data flows in only one direction, from a source terminal to one or more destination terminals. Different wire patterns represent different data types, as shown in FIG. 76. On a color monitor each data type appears in a different color for emphasis. Examples of the more common wire types are also shown in FIG. 76.
Data Flow Programming
The principle that governs how a program executes in the preferred embodiment is called data flow. A node executes only when data is available at all its input terminals; the node supplies data to all of its output terminals when it finishes; and the data passes immediately from source to destination terminals. Data flow contrasts with the control flow method of executing a conventional program, in which instructions execute in the sequence in which they are written.
As an example, consider a VI that multiplies two numbers together and then subtracts 50.0 from the result of the addition. The block diagram for such a VI is shown in FIG. 77. In this case, the block diagram executes from left to right, not because the objects are placed in that order, but because one of the inputs of the Subtract function is not valid until the Multiply function has multiplied the numbers together and passed the data to the Subtract function. It is again noted that a node (function) executes only when data is available at all of its input terminals, and it supplies data to its output terminals only when it finishes.
In the example shown in FIG. 78, it is not clear which function would execute first--the multiply or divide. This is unknown because input to both the divide and multiply functions is available at the same time. In a situation where one function must execute before another, and there is no type of dependency between the functions, a Sequence structure must be used to force the order of execution.
Basic Ideas
Referring now to FIG. 79, one key to creating applications in the preferred embodiment is understanding and using the hierarchical nature of the VI. That is, once a VI is created, it can be used as a subVI in the block diagram of a higher-level VI. When creating an application, the user should start at the top-level VI and define the inputs and outputs for the application. Then, subVIs are constructed to perform the necessary operations on the data as it flows through the block diagram. If a block diagram has a large number of icons, they should be grouped into a lower-level VI to maintain the simplicity of the block diagram. This modular approach makes applications easy to debug, understand, and maintain.
As an example, consider a VI that adds three numbers together and returns the result. The front panel and the block diagram for the VI shown in FIG. 80. To use this VI as subVI, an icon and a connector must be created for it.
Creating the Icon and Connector
A VI used as a subVI needs an icon to represent it in the block diagram of a calling VI. The subVI also must have a connector with terminals to pass data to and from the higher-level VI.
Icon
Every VI has a default icon displayed in the upper-right corner of the Panel and Diagram windows. The default icon is a blank frame. The Icon Editor is used to design the icon by turning individual pixels on and off. To activate the Icon Editor, pop up on the blank icon in the top right corner of the Panel window and select Edit Icon as shown in FIG. 81. It is noted that the menu is available only in the edit mode. The window illustrated in FIG. 82 appears. The tools shown on the left side of the illustration are used to create the icon design in the fat pixel editing area. The actual-size icon image appears in one of the boxes to the right of the editing area.
Connector
The connector is the programmatic interface to a VI. Data passes from front panel controls and to front panel indicators via the connector terminals. Connections are defined by choosing the number of terminals desired for the VI and assigning a front panel control or indicator to each of those terminals. If the panel controls or indicators are used programmatically, these controls or indicators need terminals on the connector pane.
To define a connector, Show Connector is selected from the icon pane pop-up menu, as illustrated in FIG. 83. The Diagram window does not have a connector pane. The connector replaces the icon in the upper-right corner of the Panel window, as shown in FIG. 84. The block diagram editor tries to select a terminal pattern for the VI with as many terminals on the left of the connector pane as controls on the front panel, and as many terminals on the right of the connector pane as indicators on the front panel.
Each rectangle on the connector represents a terminal area, and the rectangles may be used for either input to or output from the VI. If necessary, different terminal patterns can be selected for the VI.
Selecting and Modifying Terminal Patterns
Referring now to FIG. 85, to select a different terminal pattern for the VI, pop up on the connector and choose Patterns from the pop-,up menu. A boldfaced border highlights the pattern currently associated with the icon. To change the pattern, click on a new pattern. If a new pattern is chosen, any assignment of controls and indicators to the terminals on the old connector pane will be lost.
In order to change the spatial arrangement of the connector terminal patterns, one of the following commands from the connector pane pop-up menu is chosen: Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical, or Rotate 90° . These items are disabled if any terminal connections exist.
Assigning Terminals to Controls and Indicators
Front panel controls and indicators are assigned to the terminals using the wiring tool. The following steps detail the method to follow in order to associate the connector pane with the front panel controls and indicators.
1. Click on a connector terminal. The tool automatically changes to the Wiring tool. The terminal turns black (See FIG. 86).
2. Click on the front panel control or indicator to be assigned to the selected terminal. A marquee frames the selected control as shown in FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 88, if the cursor is positioned in free space and clicked, the dashed line disappears and the selected terminal dims, indicating that the control or indicator selected now corresponds to the dimmed terminal. It is noted that although the Wiring tool is used to assign terminals on the connector to front panel controls and indicators, no wires are drawn between the connector and these controls and indicators.
3. Steps 1 and 2 are repeated for each control and indicator to be connected.
It is also possible to select the control or indicator first and then select the terminal. A pattern can be chosen with more terminals than necessary. Unassigned terminals do not affect the operation of the VI. There can also be more front panel controls than terminals.
Using a VI as a SubVI
Any VI that has an icon and a connector may be used as a subVI in the block diagram of another VI. VIs to be used as subVIs are selected from the VI . . . option of the Functions menu as shown in FIG. 89. Choosing this option produces a file dialog box, from which any VI in the system can be selected. If a VI is opened that does not have an icon and a connector, a blank square box appears in the calling VI's block diagram. This node cannot be wired to.
A subVI is analogous to a subroutine. A subVI node (icon/connector, i.e., I-use node) is analogous to a subroutine call. The subVI node is not the subVI itself, just as a subroutine call statement in a text-based program is not the subroutine itself. A block diagram that contains several identical subVI nodes calls that subVI several times.
Opening, Operating, and Changing SubVIs
A VI used as a subVI may be opened from the calling VI block diagram. The Panel window of the subVI is opened by double-clicking on the subVI icon. The Diagram window can then be opened by selecting Show Diagram from the Windows menu.
Any changes made to a subVI alter only the version in memory until the subVI is saved. It is noted that the changes affect all calls to the subVI and not just the node used to open the VI.
Online Help for SubVI Nodes
When one of the editing tools is moved across a subVI node, the Help window shows the subVI icon with wires attached to each terminal. An example is shown in FIG. 90. Show Help Window is first selected and then an editing tool is placed on the subVI to display the wiring diagram. After choosing the Help window, the Diagram window must be clicked on to make it active.
While Loop
Referring now to FIG. 91, the While Loop, which is referred to in FIG. 12D as an indefinite loop structure, is placed in the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71). As shown in FIG. 92, the While Loop is a resizable box used to execute the diagram inside it until the Boolean value passed to the conditional terminal is FALSE. The VI checks the conditional terminal at the end of each iteration; therefore, the While Loop always executes once. The iteration terminal is an output numeric terminal that contains the number of times the loop has executed.
The While Loop is equivalent to the following pseudo-code: ##STR1## In the example shown in FIG. 93, the While Loop executes until the value output from the subVI is less than 10 or the Enable Boolean is FALSE. (The And function outputs a TRUE only if both inputs are TRUE; otherwise it outputs a FALSE.)
For Loop
Referring now to FIG. 94, the For Loop, which is referred to in FIG. 12B as an iterative loop structure, is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71). The For Loop is a resizable box, and it executes the diagram inside its border a predetermined number of times. The For Loop has two terminals: the count terminal (an input terminal) and the iteration terminal (an output terminal). The count terminal specifies the number of times (N) to execute the loop. The iteration terminal contains the number of times (i) the loop has executed.
The For Loop is equivalent to the following pseudo-code: ##STR2##
The example in FIG. 95 shows a For Loop that generates 100 random numbers and displays the points on a waveform chart. It is noted that the loop timing of For Loops and While Loops can be controlled using a function referred to as "Wait Until Next ms Multiple." This function ensures that no iteration is shorter than a specified number of milliseconds.
Numeric Conversion
All previous numeric controls and indicators are double-precision floating-point numbers. In the preferred embodiment, however, numerics can be represented as integers (byte, word, or long) or floating-point numbers (single, double, or extended precision). The default representation for a numeric is double precision floating point.
If two terminals are wired together that are of different data types, the block diagram editor converts one of the terminals to the same representation as the other terminal. As a reminder, the editor places a gray dot, called a coercion dot, on the terminal where the conversion takes place.
For example, consider the For Loop count terminal "N" in FIG. 96. The terminal representation is a long integer. If a double-precision floating-point number is wired to the count terminal, the block diagram editor converts the number to a long integer.
When the VI converts floating-point numbers to integers, the VI rounds to the nearest integer. x.5 is round to the nearest even integer. For example, 2.5 is rounded to 2 and 3.5 is rounded to 4.
Shift Registers
Referring now to FIG. 97, shift registers (available for While Loops and For Loops) are local variables that transfer values from one iteration to the next. A shift register is created by popping up on the left or right loop border and selecting Add Shift Register from the pop-up menu.
As shown in FIG. 97, the shift register contains a pair of terminals directly opposite each other on the vertical sides of the loop border. The right terminal stores the data upon the completion of an iteration. That data is shifted at the end of the iteration and it appears in the left terminal at the beginning of the next iteration (see FIG. 98). A shift register can hold any data type--numeric, Boolean, string, array, and so on. The shift register automatically adapts to the data type of the first object that is wired to the shift register.
As shown in FIG. 99, the shift register can be configured to remember values from several previous iterations. This feature is very useful when averaging data points. Additional terminals are created to access values from previous iterations by popping up on the left terminal and choosing Add Element from the pop-up menu. For example, if three elements are added to the left ternfinal, values can be accessed from the last three iterations.
Initializing Shift Registers
Referring now to FIG. 100, to initialize the shift register with a specific value, the initial value is wired to the left terminal of the shift register (outside the While Loop). If the initial value is left unwired, the initial value will be the default value for the shift register data type. For example, if the shift register data type is Boolean, the initial value will be FALSE. Similarly, if the shift register data type is numeric, the initial value will be zero.
It is noted that values stored in the shift register are not discarded until the VI is closed and removed from memory. In other words, if a VI is run which contains uninitialized shift registers, the initial values for the subsequent run will be the ones left from the previous run.
Case Structure
Referring now to FIG. 101, the Case Structure is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71). The Case Structure shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 are analogous to case statements or if . . . then . . . else statements in conventional, text-based programming languages. The Case Structure is configured like a deck of cards; only one case is visible at a time. Each case contains a subdiagram. Only one case executes depending on the value wired to the selector terminal. The selector terminal can be either numeric or Boolean as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, respectively. If the data type is Boolean, the structure has a True case and a False case. If the data type is numeric, the structure can have up to 231 -1 l cases.
FIG. 104 is an example of a Boolean Case structure. In this example, the numbers pass through tunnels to the Case structure, and are either added or subtracted, depending on the value wired to the selector terminal. If the Boolean wired to the selector terminal is FALSE, the VI will add the numbers; otherwise, the VI will subtract the numbers.
Sequence Structure
Referring now to FIG. 105, the Sequence Structure is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71). As shown in FIG. 106, the Sequence Structure looks like a frame of film, and it operates to execute diagrams sequentially. In conventional text-based languages, the program statements execute in the order in which they appear. In contrast, in data flow programming a node executes when data is available at all of the node inputs. However, sometimes it is necessary to ensure that one node is executed before another. The Sequence Structure is a method of controlling the order in which nodes execute. The diagram to be executed first is placed inside the border of Frame 0, the diagram to be executed second is placed inside the border of Frame 1, and so on. As with the Case Structure, only one frame is visible at a time.
Sequence Locals
Sequence locals are variables that pass data between frames of a Sequence structure. Sequence locals can be created on the border of a frame. the data wired to a frame sequence local is then available in subsequent frames. The data, however, is not available in frames preceding the frame in which the sequence local was created.
The example illustrated in FIG. 107 shows a three-frame Sequence structure. A sequence local in Frame 1 passes the value that the Tick Count (ms) function returns. (The Tick Count (ms) function returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since power on.) Note that this value is available in Frame 2 (as the arrow pointing into Frame 2 indicates). Also note that the VI displays only one sequence frame at a time.
Formula Node
Referring now to FIG. 108, the Formula Node is placed on the block diagram by selecting it from the Structs & Constants palette of the Functions menu (FIG. 71). The Formula Node is a resizable box that is used to enter algebraic formulas directly into the block diagram. This feature is extremely useful when the function equation has many variables or is otherwise complicated. For example, consider the equation y=x2 +x+1. If this equation is implemented using regular arithmetic functions, the block diagram appears like that shown in FIG. 109. The same equation can be implemented using a Formula Node, as shown in FIG. 110.
With the Formula Node, the user can directly enter a complicated formula, or formulas, in lieu of creating block diagram subsections. The input and output terminals of the Formula Node are created by popping up on the border of the node and choosing Add Input (Add Output) from the pop-up menu. The formula or formulas are entered inside the box. Each formula statement must terminate with a semicolon (;).
Waveform Charts
The waveform chart is a special numeric indicator that displays one or more plots. The waveform chart is in the Graph palette of the Controls menu. Waveform charts may display single or multiple traces. An example of a multiple-plot waveform chart is shown in FIG. 111.
As shown in FIG. 112, the waveform chart has three update modes--strip chart, scope chart, and sweep chart. The update mode can be selected by popping up on the waveform chart and choosing one of the options from the Data Operation Update Mode menu. (In the run mode, Update Mode from the chart pop-up menu is selected.)
The strip chart has a scrolling display similar to a paper strip chart. The scope chart and the sweep chart have retracing displays similar to an oscilloscope. Because there is less overhead in retracing a plot, the scope chart and the sweep chart are significantly faster than the strip chart in displaying plots. On the scope chart, when the plot reaches the right border of the plotting area, the plot is erased, and plotting begins again from the left border. The sweep chart acts much like the scope chart, but the display does not blank when the data reaches the right border. Instead, a moving vertical line marks the beginning of new data and moves across the display as new data is added.
Wiring a Single-Plot Chart
A scalar output can be directly wired to a waveform chart. The data type displayed in the waveforms chart's terminal icon matches the input type, as shown in FIG. 113.
Wiring a Multiple-Plot Chart
Waveform charts can accommodate more than one plot. The data must be bundled together using the Bundle function (Array & Cluster menu). As shown in FIG. 114, the Bundle function "bundles" or groups the output of the three different VIs that acquire temperature for plotting on the waveform chart. It is noted that the waveform chart terminal icon changes. To add more plots, the number of Bundle function input terminals are increased by resizing the Bundle function using the Positioning tool.
Local and Global Variable Capabilities of the Present Invention
In a traditional data flow program as described in Kodosky et al, a data source is connected to a data sink by means of a wire. Generally, the data sink can only receive information from the data source when the source has finished its computation. In other words, the data sink cannot begin execution until the source has completed. However, if two or more objects are operating in parallel whereby it is desired that they interact, such as one providing data to the other before each completes, a local or global variable according to the present invention must be used for this purpose. A local variable is local to a particular VI and cannot be associated by other VIs. If the two objects are in different VIs, then a global variable must be used.
Local Variable Capability
In the preferred embodiment of the invention, a local variable capability is provided which enables a user to more effectively create block diagram programs and model processes in a graphical programming environment. One benefit of this local variable capability is that a user is allowed to use local variables in their respective VIs which are not affected by other VIs or other block diagrams. This provides a cleaner programming environment and ensures that a user's local variable will not be affected by undesirable changes in other parts of the block diagram.
A second benefit of the local variable capability of the present invention is that a user can have multiple functions, such as loops, operating wherein each function can potentially affect the input or output to a control or indicator. Thus, multiple loops executing concurrently can each affect the input or output to a control or indicator as desired. In contrast, in the method described in Kodosky et al, only one terminal to a control was provided and thus only one function could affect the input and output to a control or indicator.
A third benefit of the present invention is that a read/write control is available to allow the user to more effectively interact with the front panel. A read/write control is defined as a control that the user can read and/or change while the program is executing and that the block diagram can read and/or change during execution. In other words, the user can read and/or change the control during execution and the user can program a block diagram providing the block diagram with the capability to read and/or change the control programmatically during execution. Thus, the local variable capability of the present invention essentially allows input/output control for controls.
Creating a Local Variable
A local variable is associated with a control on the front panel of a VI. Therefore, a VI must exist before a local variable is created. Referring now to FIG. 115, to create a local variable, the Local Variable option is selected from the Structs and Constants menu. The Structs and Constants menu is illustrated in FIG. 116.
A node that looks like that shown in FIG. 117 appears. If the user "pops up" on the node, he can select the control he wants to read or set from a list of all the top-level front panel controls and indicators. The list is derived from the owned labels of front panel controls and indicators. Thus, the user should label his front panel controls and indicators with descriptive names, using owned labels. It is noted that if controls and indicators are on the front panel, and then a local variable is created, the local variable will contain the name of the front control or indicator placed on the front panel. For example, if the user has a control labeled Set Point and then creates a local variable, the node would appear as Set Point.
After the user deposits the local variable on the block diagram, the user can select the appropriate variable by either clicking on it using the Operating tool, or popping up on it and choosing the variable from the Select Item menu, as shown in FIG. 118.
Referring now to FIG. 119, the user can also determine whether he wants to read or write to the control by selecting either the Change To Read Local or the Change to Write Local option. If the user wants to read what is currently stored in the local variable, it should be read local, and if the user wants to write a new value to the local variable, it should be a write local.
FIG. 120 illustrates local variables referred to as month, year, age and day as well as the Select Item menu for these variables. FIG. 121 illustrates how the user can have multiple local variables accessing the same control, with each having a different sense, i.e., either reading or writing to a control. It is noted that the user must be careful to sequence the access to local variables or global variables so that the desired results are obtained, as in the example above. For example, there is no guarantee that the "Write" to age will occur before the "Read" from age if the user does not create the proper sequencing.
Referring now to FIG. 122, a flowchart diagram illustrating operation of the block diagram editor when a local variable is created is shown. When the user creates a local variable by selecting the local variable option from the Structs and Constants menu, in step 602 the block diagram editor displays the local variable icon in the block diagram. When the user selects the desired control for the local variable, the block diagram editor associates the local variable with the control in the respective VI panel in step 604. In step 606 the block diagram editor assigns memory in the random access memory (RAM) to the local variable. In step 608 the block diagram editor creates a code routine to either read to or write to the local variable, depending upon the user's selection of "change to read local" or "change to write local." In other words, this code routine transfers data between the local variable memory and the control memory. It is noted that this code routine can only be used by nodes contained in the VI where the local variable resides.
Referring now to FIG. 123, when memory is assigned to the local variable in step 606 (FIG. 122) storage is associated with each control on the panel that is appropriate for its data type. For example, an integer will have 1, 2, or 4 bytes, a floating point number 4, 8, 10, 12, or maybe 16. Other types such as strings are variable in length; so the memory allocated to them must be variable. Storage for a string is referred to as a handle, meaning a pointer to a pointer to a moveable sizeable block of memory. Strings and arrays, for example, an arrays of numerics, are stored as handles.
When updating the value of a control or indicator through a local or global, the memory associated with the control must be updated. For local variables according to the present invention this is accomplished by machine code generated by the local variable to move the memory from the data signal on the block diagram to the control on the front panel for a write to the local, or from the control to the data signal for a read of the local. The code is generated in a generic way depending on the control's data type and is specific to each data type. For example, to write a numeric such as an integer to a control associated with a local variable, the code associated with the local variable simply moves the appropriate number of bytes for the data type. To write a string to a control associated with a local variable, the following code is generated: a call to a function to get the size of the source string, a call to a function to set the size of the destination string, and then a call to a third function to move the string from the source to the destination. Because code routines used to move various data structure types between a source and destination are well known to those skilled in the art, details of their operation are omitted for simplicity.
Local Variable Operation
One characteristic of data flow program execution as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221 is that structures and subVIs do not output data until they finish executing. Occasionally, the user may want to pass data between structures or VIs that are not connected by a wire. Local variables according to the present invention can be used to easily access a given set of values throughout their respective VIs.
The following example illustrates the need for local variables. In this example, a VI includes a front panel having two waveform charts, as shown. A block diagram having two While loops is used where each includes a random number generator connected to a respective chart to generate a waveform on the respective chart. In this example, it is desired that one on/off switch be used to control, i.e., turn on and off, the two While Loops. The front panel for the VI is illustrated in FIG. 124.
Method 1 (Incorrect)
Referring now to FIG. 125, a first incorrect method to accomplish the desired result is shown. In this incorrect method, the switch terminal is placed outside of both loops and is wired to each conditional terminal, as shown. In this case, the switch is read only once before either While Loop begins executing. If a true value is passed into the loops, the While Loops run indefinitely. Turning off the switch does not stop the VI because the switch is not read each time through the loop. Because the switch is read only one time, this solution does not work.
Method 2 (Incorrect)
Referring now to FIG. 126, a second incorrect method is shown. In this incorrect method the switch terminal is moved inside Loop 1 so that it is read at each iteration of the loop. Although Loop I terminates properly, there is a problem with this approach also. Loop 2 does not execute until it receives all its inputs, and Loop 1 does not pass out the value of the switch until it terminates. Thus, Loop 2 executes only after Loop I finishes, and these loops do not execute in parallel.
The previous two examples demonstrate the need for local variables according to the present invention. The user may need to pass information between two locations on a block diagram. Sometimes it is impossible, as shown above, to connect those two locations with a wire. Although this is a simple example, it shows a characteristic of data flow programming described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,901,221--subVIs and structures do not execute until all inputs are available and they do not output values until they have finished executing. Thus, without the present invention, it is not possible to pass a value from a single terminal into two parallel loops. A local variable according to the present invention can be used to solve this problem. Local variables are used to access a single front panel object from multiple locations on the block diagram.
Method 3 (Correct)
Referring now to FIG. 127, a correct method whereby one switch is used to control two While Loops using local variables according to the present invention is shown. In this example another terminal is created that can be used to access a single control from multiple locations. This separate terminal is called a local variable. The On/Off Switch terminal is placed inside Loop 1 and a local variable instance of that switch is placed inside Loop 2. Thus, whenever the switch is turned off, both loops read a false and the VI stops.
As previously mentioned, local variables can be used to read a user's inputs from controls and output results to an indicator. As a further example, suppose it is desirable to determine what parameters were used to run a VI previously and place those values in controls for a user to modify. Local variables can be used to write those values into a control, as well as allow the user to update a control from the block diagram. Also, the user can have any number of local variable references for a given front panel control, with some in write mode and others in read mode. Thus, with a local variable reference, the user can use a front panel control both as an input and an output to create a control/indicator object.
Example
Referring now to FIG. 128, to understand these concepts, an example using local variables is shown. The front panel in FIG. 128 includes a single string indicator, i.e., an indicator which displays a single string. The block diagram includes two while loops. Suppose the user wants to update the string in the front panel to display which loop is currently executing. Without a local or global variable, there is no way to accomplish this. The user can place the indicator terminal in either one loop or the other. Using a local variable, however, the user can create two instances of the same front panel indicator, so that a single indicator displays the current location of execution. The Which Loop? indicator is placed in Loop One and a local variable instance or copy of that indicator is placed in Loop Two. "Loop 1" and "Loop 2" strings are connected to the respective Which Loop? local variables and display the respective loop executing.
Although the example in FIG. 128 is very simple, it shows that an indicator can be updated in two separate locations in the diagram. The user may also want to pass data between two different locations on the diagram, and the local variable according to the present invention can be used to accomplish this as well.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 129-132, an example of a VI that uses a local variable to update a string indicator and graph in multiple places on a block diagram is shown. The user first creates a panel of a VI as shown in FIG. 129. It is noted that this VI, referred to as the Waveform Monitor VI, is included as an example VI in the preferred embodiment of the invention marketed under the trademark LabVIEW®. As shown, this VI includes a waveform graph indicator and a Current Process string indicator.
In order to construct the block diagram illustrated in FIGS. 130-132 the user switches to edit mode by clicking on the Mode button. As shown in FIGS. 130-132, the block diagram comprises a sequence structure having three frames referred to as 0, 1, and 2. Frame 0 acquires and graphs a sine wave, frame I acquires and graphs a square pattern and frame 2 acquires and graphs a sawtooth pattern.
The block diagram employs the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (FIG. 152A) from the Dialog and Date/Time menu. As previously noted, this function allows a user to set the time period in which a diagram executes. In FIG. 130 this function is configured receiving an input of 5000, meaning that this sequence frame will not complete until 5000 ms or 5 seconds has elapsed. The Acquire Waveform VI illustrated in FIGS. 130-132 returns a specified waveform depending on the constant value passed to it. Current Process and Waveform are local variables that update indicators at multiple locations in the block diagram. The Waveform local displays the waveform currently being generated. The Current Process local variable displays a message indicating to the user which waveform is being graphed. The steps for creating the local variables are described below.
The user first selects the Local Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and then chooses the variable name by clicking on the local with the Operating tool. To make additional locals, the user simply copies the variable and pastes it to a different location, making sure that all of these local variables are write locals. To do this, the user pops up on the local and selects Change to Write Local. If this option is not available, the local is currently in the correct state.
Thus the block diagram illustrated in FIGS. 130-132 uses two local variables. One local variable updates the graph in each sequence, i.e. in each frame of the sequence structure, while the other updates the string indicator with the current status of the VI. When the VI is run, the same graph displays each waveform generated in each of the sequence structure frames. Similarly, one string indicator immediately displays what is taking place in each sequence. The VI illustrated in FIGS. 129-132 is referred to in the following discussion as Waveform Monitor.vi.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 133-136, a VI example which illustrates how a local variable is used to both read and write to a front panel control is shown. The user first creates a front panel as shown in FIG. 133. It is also noted that the front panel of this VI, referred to as the Select and Generate Waveform VI is included as a VI in LabVIEW®. The front panel includes a menu ring referred to as Waveform Type, an oblong button referred to as Generate Waveform, a Stop button, and a waveform graph referred to as Test Results.
In order to create a block diagram for this VI as shown in FIGS. 134-136, the user first switches to edit mode by clicking on the Mode button. As shown, the block diagram includes a sequence structure having three frames 0, 1, and 2. Frame 0 is illustrated in FIG. 134 and frames 1 and 2 are illustrated in FIGS. 135 and 136, respectively. The sequence structure is comprised within a conditional structure which in turn is comprised in a while loop. The True case of the conditional structure is shown in FIG. 134, and it is noted that the False case is empty.
In building the diagram as illustrated in FIGS. 134-136, the Wait function from the Dialog & Date/Time menu is used in frame 1 of the sequence structure to generate a three-second delay before the graph and ring control are reset to default values which occur in frame 2. The Acquire Waveform VI is used in frames 0 and 2 of the sequence structure to generate a waveform to be displayed on the graph. Local variables referred to as Test Results and Waveform Type are used to reset the ring control and the waveform graph in frame 2 after the waveform has been plotted. The Not function from the Arithmetic menu and illustrated in FIG. 152B inverts the value of the Stop button in the while loop; thus, the while loop executes repeatedly until the user clicks on the Stop button. The Numeric Constant from the Structs & Constants menu, which appears as a 0 enclosed by a rectangle in FIG. 136, is used to pass a 0 value into the Waveform Type local variable and the Acquire Waveform subVI in frame 2 to clear the menu ring and graph.
The steps for creating the local variables are discussed below. The user first selects the Local Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and chooses the variable name by clicking on the local variable with the Operating tool. To make additional locals, the user simply copies the variable and pastes it to a different location. It is important to make sure that all local variables are write locals. To accomplish this, the user pops up on the local and selects Change to Write Local. If this option is not available, the local is currently in the correct state. To run or execute the VI, the user selects the waveform to generate and presses the waveform generation button. It is noted that during execution in frame 2 of the Sequence structure, the VI sets the menu ring to the first option by writing a 0 to the local. Additionally, the VI clears the Test Results graph in frame 2 by using the Acquire Wavetoa-m subVI to output an array of zeros, and writing the array to the Test Results local variable.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 137 and 138, a VI that generates two different random numbers and displays them on two waveform charts is shown. As shown in FIG. 137, the front panel of the VI has a single on/off switch and two waveform charts referred to as Chart 1 and chart 2. As shown in FIG. 138, the block diagram includes two While Loops. The Random Number (0-1) function (Arithmetic menu) is used to generate the data that is provided to the local variables Chart I and Chart 2. The On/off switch stops the execution of both loops. A local variable instance of the On/Off Switch is used to stop one of the While Loops. It is noted that the local variable must be a read local.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 139, 140, and 140A-C, a VI that continuously generates random numbers and displays them inside digital indicators until the stop button is pressed is shown. As shown in FIG. 139, the front panel includes a slide control referred to as Selector which includes Stand By, Number One, Number Two, and Numbers One and Two selections. Referring now to FIG. 140, the block diagram includes a While loop which includes a conditional structure having four frames 0-3. Frame 0 (FIG. 140A) is empty, frame 1 (FIG. 140B) includes a random number generator connected to the Number One local variable, frame 2 includes a random number generator connected to the Number Two local variable, and frame 3 (FIG. 140) includes two random number generators connected to Number and Number Two, respectively. The Number One and Number Two indicators generate either Number One, Number Two, or both Number One and Number Two random numbers depending on the selection of the slide control. If the slide control is in the Stand By position, the VI does not generate any numbers.
As shown in FIG. 140 and discussed above, local variables are used to write to the indicators from different cases of a Case structure depending on the position of the slide control. Referring now to FIG. 141, the block diagram of the VI has been modified so that the slide is initialized to Stand By before the numbers are generated. As shown, the block diagram uses a sequence structure having frame 0 which includes a local variable to initialize the selector. The value is wired to the edge of the loop to ensure that the initialization happens before the loop begins.
Global Variable Capability
As discussed in the background section, the method described in Kodosky et al provided a way of creating "global variables" which are implemented as shift registers in a loop contained within a subVI. This resulted in numerous inefficiencies, such as memory storage overhead and execution overhead. According to the present invention, a global variable corresponds to a control on a global variable panel, i.e., global variables are implemented simply as a control and are not associated with a shift register or loop function. When a control on the global variable panel is created, the block diagram editor sets aside memory location storage for that control's data type. Thus, implementing a global variable as a control considerably reduces both the storage and execution overhead.
In the present invention, the global variable is a built-in object. The user defines a global variable by creating a special kind of global variable panel with controls that define the data type of the global variable. For example, if the user needs to pass a number between two VIs running concurrently, a global variable panel that contains a single numeric control is created. This global variable panel does not have a block diagram associated with it. The numeric control on the global variable front panel is a common storage place for the number passed between the two VIs. If the user needs to pass a Boolean value and a number between two VIs, there are two methods in which to pass multiple values between VIs. The user can create two global variable VIs, one with a Boolean control and one with a numeric control. In an alternate method, the user creates one global VI that contains both a Boolean and a numeric control. The second approach, using multiple variables in one global VI, is more efficient and it can be used to group related variables together.
Creating a Global Variable
Referring now to FIG. 142, a global variable is created by selecting the Global Variable option from the Structs and Constants menu. The Structs and Constants menu is shown in FIG. 143. When the Global Variable option is selected, a node (FIG. 144) for the global appears on the diagram. Initially, the node contains "?" because the user has not yet defined its type. The user first opens the global variable panel by double clicking on the node and then defines the data type for each of the global variables on the panel by placing controls on this panel the same way they are placed on a standard VI front panel. Each control must be labeled with an owned label for reference to each variable by its name. FIG. 145 illustrates three globals--a number, a string, and a cluster containing two values. The user also can optionally create an icon for the global variable panel.
After the user defines a panel and optional icon for the global variable panel and saves the global panel, he returns to the block diagram of the original VI. Because the global variable panel can define multiple variables on its front panel, the user must select the specific global variable desired to be accessed. Referring now to FIG. 146, to select a specific global variable, the user pops up on the node and selects the item from the Select Item menu. The node then displays the name of the global variable selected. (The name used is in the control's owned label).
Alternatively, using the Operating tool, the user simply clicks on the node and chooses the global variable he wants to access as shown in FIG. 147. After the user has selected the specific global variable he wants to access, the node changes to display the variable chosen. The user may want to use this set of global variables in other VIs. A global variable is simply a special kind of VI and thus is placed in other VIs using the VI . . . option of the Functions menu. The user can then pop up on the node to select the specific global variable desired to be accessed. After placing the global variable on the diagram, the user will either write data to it or read data from it. If the user wants to write a new value into the global variable, the user must make it a write variable. To do this, he pops up on the variable and selects Change to Write Global as shown in FIG. 148. When he wants to read the value that is currently stored in the global variable, the user must make it a read variable. To do this, he pops up on the variable and selects Change to Read Global.
Therefore, in creating a global variable, the user first places an icon for the global variable in the block diagram, and then creates a control on a global variable panel for that global. This assigns a data type to the global and reserves memory storage for that global. The user assigns a name to the control which thereby assigns a name to the global variable. Multiple global variables can be created in two ways. First, the user can create several VIs, each with one item or one global variable, second, the user can create one multiple global VI by defining multiple data types on the one global variable panel. The multiple global VI approach is more efficient, and allows the user to group related variables together.
In an alternate embodiment, global variables are implemented in a manner similar to local variables whereby they correspond to controls on the front panel of a functional VI. In this embodiment, a global variable occurrence in a first VI can directly affect front panel controls on a second VI. This is in contrast to the preferred embodiment, whereby a global variable corresponds to a control on a special global variable panel not associated with a functional VI. In the preferred embodiment, a global variable occurrence in a first VI cannot directly affect a front panel control in a second VI, but rather can only affect the control on the special global variable panel. The second VI would be required to read the value of this global variable control to affect controls on the second front panel.
Referring now to FIG. 149, a method performed by the block diagram editor in creating a global variable is shown. This method is similar to the method illustrated in FIG. 122 for local variables. In step 612 when the user pops up a global variable on a screen, the block diagram editor displays its global variable icon in the block diagram. Once the user has dropped a global variable icon in the block diagram, the block diagram editor associates the global variable icon with a control in the global variable panel in response to the user's selecting a control in the panel. As previously noted, this panel is a special global variable panel not associated with a functional VI. In step 616 the block diagram editor assigns a memory location to the global variable. In step 618 the block diagram editor creates a code routine to read and write to the global variable. It is noted that steps 612-618 are similar to steps 602-608 except that the code created in step 618 allows other VIs access to this memory location, whereas the code created for a local variable in step 608 only allows access to the memory location by a node within the respective VI where the local variable resides. Also, a local variable is associated with an existing control in a functional VI, whereas when a global variable is created, the user places a control in a global variable panel.
One example of how the global variable of the present invention might be used in a data program is where two while loops in different VIs are running independently and in parallel, perhaps at different rates, and it is desirable that they communicate data between each other. For instance, if one while loop is measuring a temperature and the other while loop is performing analysis using that temperature, the only way to transfer data between those two while loops is through a global variable, since data cannot leave the while loop until the while loop has finished execution. A local variable cannot be used since the two loops are in different VIs.
FIG. 150 illustrates two VIs running simultaneously where each VI writes a random number to a waveform chart. The first VI also contains a Boolean to terminate both VIs. It is noted that when both loops are on a single diagram, i.e., in a single VI, a local variable can be used to terminate the loops. Where each loop is in a separate VI, a global variable must be used to terminate the loops.
There are two key points regarding global variables. First, a value should be written to a global variable or the global variable initializes to a default value before the global variable can be read. If the user attempts to read a value from a global variable before he writes to it, the output is the default value for that data type. Second, the user may write to the global variable at a location separate from where he reads from it--in different locations of the block diagram or structure, in different structures or VIs.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 151-154, an example of a VI that writes to a global variable is shown. Before a global variable can be created, a VI must exist. The first step in creating a VI is opening a front panel. Because the VI in this example is used only to generate numbers, there is no need for front panel objects in the front panel (not shown). FIG. 151 illustrated a global variable panel, and FIG. 154 illustrates a block diagram using the global variable. The global variable panel in FIG. 151 includes a global Number to Pass variable and a global Boolean Stop Button variable to pass values between two VIs running concurrently. In the block diagram shown in FIG. 154, the user pops up and selects the Global Variable option from the Structs & Constants menu and then double-clicks on the global node to bring up the global front panel. The user then creates the global variable panel as shown in FIG. 151. It is noted that the user must label controls with owned labels. It is also noted that there is no block diagram associated with this global panel VI. This global variable panel is referred to as My Globals.vi in the following description.
Referring now to FIG. 154, a block diagram using the global variables in FIG. 151 is shown. The block diagram includes a While loop wherein the Stop button global is connected through a Not function (FIG. 152B) to the while icon. The Not function (FIG. 152B) (Arithmetic menu) inverts the value of the Stop Button global, and thus the While Loop executes repeatedly until it reads a TRUE. The Numbers to Pass is connected to the iteration icon of the While loop, as shown. The While loop also uses the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (FIG. 152A) (Dialog and Date/Time menu) which dictates that each loop iteration occurs every second The block diagram also includes a sequence structure having only one frame, frame 0. The sequence structure includes the Stop Button global which is initialized with a False value. The False constant is also wired to the loop border of the While loop to force the initialization of the global to occur before the loop begins executing, i.e., to place an artificial data dependency on the two VIs. This prevents the While Loop from reading an uninitialized global variable (that is, one that has an unknown value).
In creating the block diagram, the following steps occur. First, the user first places a sequence structure and indefinite loop (while loop) structure on the diagram as shown. Using the Operating tool, the user clicks on the global variable node and selects the Stop Button as shown in FIG. 153. When this is done the global variable now displays the name of the global that he wants to access. The user then makes three copies of the Stop Button global. The user changes one of the globals to the Number to Pass global by clicking on it with the Operating tool and selecting Number to Pass. These three globals are placed in the block diagram as shown. By default, the globals are write globals. That is, the user writes to the global instead of reading from it, as is the case with the Stop Button global in the Sequence structure and the Number to Pass global variable. If the user wants to read from a global, as is in the case with the Stop Button global inside the While Loop, he must change it to a read global. To do so, the user pops up on the global and selects Change to Read Global. The user then initializes the Stop Button global variable inside the Sequence structure by writing a FALSE to it and wires the constant to the loop border as previously discussed. This VI is referred to in the following description as Generate Numbers.vi.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 155-156 a VI that reads from a global variable created in the previous example is shown. This VI displays the values generated in Generate Numbers on a waveform chart. The user first creates the front panel illustrated in FIG. 155. As shown, this VI front panel includes a waveform chart referred to as iterations, a vertical slide referred to as Time Delay, and a Stop button. This front panel is also available as the Display Numbe,'s VI in the preferred embodiment of the invention marketed under the trademark LabVIEW 3. The user then switches to edit mode to create the block diagram (FIG. 156) by clicking on the Mode button.
To add the global variables to the diagram, the user employs the VI . . . option from the Functions menu to load My Globals.vi. The node displayed will be either Stop Button or Number to Pass, depending on the order in which they are added to My Globals.vi. The user then copies the global variable so that he has two instances--one Stop Button global and one Number to Pass global. To access a different variable, the user clicks on the node with the Operating tool and chooses the variable. The user changes the Number to Pass global variable to read global by popping up on the node and choosing Change to Read Global from the pop-up menu.
The block diagram shown in FIG. 156 employs the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function (Dialog and Date/Time menu) to dictate how fast each loop iteration occurs. The Time Delay control icon and a constant (1000) are connected to a multiply node which in turn provides its output to the Wait Until Next ms Multiple function. The Multiply function (Arithmetic menu) converts seconds to milliseconds. A False value is connected to a Not function which is connected to the While loop icon. The Stop button global is also connected to the Not function. The Not function (Arithmetic menu) inverts the value of the Stop Button and causes the While Loop to execute repeatedly until the user clicks on the button, and The Stop Button and Number to Pass globals are used to pass values between two concurrently running VIs.
The VI reads a value from the Number to Pass global variable and passes the value to the waveform chart. The VI also writes the current value of the Stop button to the Stop Button global variable each time through the loop. This Boolean value is read in the Generate Numbers VI to control its While Loop as well. The user then saves the VI, which is referred to as Display Numbers.vi.
When the Generate Numbers and Display Numbers front panels are run or executed, the following events occur. The waveform chart on the Display Numbers front panel displays the data. The Generate Numbers VI continually writes the value of i to the Number to Pass global variable, and the Display Numbers VI is reading that global variable and updating the chart. The Time Delay value determines how often the global variable is read. It is noted that Time Delay has an effect on the values plotted on the waveform chart. If the Time Delay is set to 0, the same i value is read from the global variable several times. If the Time Delay is set to a value greater than 1, the Display Numbers VI may never read some values generated in the Generate Numbers VI. If Time Delay is set to approximately 1, each value generated is read once and only once in Display Number.
It is noted that when using globals, if the user is not careful, values may be read more than once, or may not be read at all. If every single update must be processed, the user must take special care to ensure that a new value is not written to a global variable until the previous one has been read, and that after a global has been read, it is not read again until another value has been written to the global.
When the user presses the STOP button on the Display Numbers front panel to stop the VI, both the Display Numbers and Generate Numbers VIs stop. The VI continually writes the value of the STOP button to the Stop Button global variable. That value is then read in the Generate Numbers VI and passed to the conditional terminal to control its loop as well. When the STOP button is pressed, a TRUE passes through the global variable to Generate Numbers, where that TRUE value is read to stop that VI as well.
Example
Referring now to FIGS. 157 and 158 the front panel and block diagram of a VI that uses both global and local variables is shown. This VI uses artificial data dependency to control the execution order. The front panel includes a waveform chart, a Stop button and Left and Right Loop Counters. The block diagram (FIG. 158) includes two While loops as shown as well as a sequence structure having frame 0. A local variable referred to as Chart is included in each of the While loops, as shown. A random number generator is connected to the Chart local variable in the left While loop, as shown. The Chart local variable is also included in the right While loop and is connected to a Fractional icon, as shown. The output of the Fractional icon is provided to a Concatenate strings icon. Other inputs to the Concatenate String icon are a Get Date/Time String icon, a tab icon, and a carriage return icon. The output of the Concatenate Strings icon is provided to a Write File icon which writes the string to a file. Each of the While loops and the sequence structure uses the Stop Global global variable to terminate execution, as shown.
The VI begins by opening a new file and writing a FALSE value to a Stop Global global variable, as shown at the top of the block diagram. A FALSE is written to the global to prevent the right While Loop from reading an uninitialized value in the event that it executes before the left While Loop.
The left While Loop updates the waveform chart using the Random Number Generator. The right While Loop reads the Local Variable Random Number every two seconds, converts the number to a string, and writes it to the file. The VI also writes the current time to the file. After the right While Loop terminates (indicating the Stop button has been pressed), the file is closed. The use of artificial data dependency to pass the file refnum to Close File through the right side of the right While Loop. In other words, the wire connection between the right While loop and the close File icon means that the Close File icon can only execute after the right While loop completes.
Only local variables could have been used in this block diagram. That is, there is no need to use a global variable for the Stop Button. Both globals and locals were used to demonstrate the fact that the user can use local and globals together in one VI. Global variables are used primarily when information needs to be passed between different VIs.
Local and Global Variable Summary
Therefore, to summarize, local variables are used to access front panel objects at various locations in a block diagram and are accessible only in that single VI. If a value needs to be passed between multiple VIs in an application, a global variable according to the present invention can be used. Thus a global variable is similar to a local variable except that it can pass values between multiple VIs.
Therefore, global and local variables behave very similarly and are implemented very similarly. One distinction that can be drawn between the two is that a local variable is peculiar to the panel corresponding to the VI where the local is created, whereas a global variable is global to all VIs. Further, a global is not created in a functional VI, but rather is created in its own global variable panel not associated with a VI whose only purpose is to facilitate the implementation of a global variable. The data storage of a local variable is one of the controls on a VI's front panel.
In text-based programming environments, the use of global variables is a typical source for bugs in a large program. Likewise, both global and local variables corrupt the normal data flow in a data flow diagram. One novel feature of the present invention is that a control is associated with each local and global variable. Thus a block diagram having one or more local or global variables according to the present invention is considerably easier to debug than a typical text-based program. While running the program, the user can view which nodes are updating the variables and the values they have at a particular point in time by merely opening up the panel and viewing the controls updating as the variables are updated. The user can also interact with the local and global variables, for instance setting them to a predefined value before execution of the program, or setting the variable during execution of the program, simply by operating the respective controls. Thus, when a user is debugging a block diagram, he can have the block diagram and the respective panel appear on the screen simultaneously. As the block diagram executes, he can watch the variables in the panel change accordingly and can also change the values. This provides a much more intuitive debugging environment for the user than is typically provided in text-based programming languages.
Alternate Embodiments
The global variable and local variables in the preferred embodiment offer only an atomic read and atomic write for their access types. The atomic read and atomic write are necessary to ensure that, for instance, simultaneous reads and writes on the same variable don't occur. It would be undesirable for a block diagram to read values that were only halfway written. In order to prevent this an atomic write and atomic read method is implemented so that if a write is in progress, the read is suspended and doesn't take place until the writer has completed. In an alternate embodiment an incremental write feature is implemented in which the value is atomically incremented or decremented. An example of this would be: make the global three more than it currently is, or five less than it currently is. In another embodiment another access mode referred to as a clearing read is included. This is an atomic operation where the value is returned to the reader and atomically cleared. In other words, it is similar to saying, "Give me the value of the global, and immediately clear it." In yet another embodiment, a test and set feature is included in which the user can use a global variable to ensure that only one piece of diagram code is referencing another access type. Test and set could be used to implement semaphores or mutual exclusion code. In another embodiment, the present invention enqueues and dequeues values so that a global variable is actually a series of first in, first out type of an array of values. Also, a wait for change feature which includes an occurrence or other indication that the global had changed so that globals do not need to be polled as often. Also, an alternate embodiment of the invention is able to log a sequence of global values and time of change to a file or to another place in memory. This is useful as a debugging log to see when conditions occur where multiple diagrams write to a global, which went first, and which is denied access to the global.
Conclusion
In summary, global and local variables can be employed to access a given set of values throughout the present invention. Global variables pass data out of a subVI before it has finished executing or pass values between two VIs running concurrently. Global variables store their data in a control in a special global variable panel for that global variable. Local variables serve a similar purpose within a single VI, storing data in items on the front panel of the VI in which the user paces that local variable. If global variables are employed, a user should write a value to a global variable before reading from it. When a user writes to a local variable, he updates its corresponding front panel object. When the user reads from a local variable, he reads the current value of its corresponding front panel object. The user can view changes to global and local variables on the respective panels, thus considerably easing debugging.

Claims (18)

We claim:
1. A method for programming a computer system including a video display screen and means for creating a virtual instrument, the method comprising the computer implemented steps of:
displaying on the screen a first control in a first virtual instrument, wherein said first control displays data in said first virtual instrument, wherein said first control has associated memory storage;
displaying on the screen a first terminal icon in said first virtual instrument, wherein said first terminal icon references said memory storage associated with said first control;
displaying on the screen a first function icon in said first virtual instrument that references a first function control means for performing a first function;
displaying on the screen a second function icon in said first virtual instrument that references a second function control means for performing a second function;
displaying on the screen a first variable icon in said first virtual instrument associated with said first control that references said memory storage associated with said first control;
assembling on the screen a first graphical program in said first virtual instrument including said first terminal icon, said first function icon, said second function icon and said first variable icon, wherein said first function icon is connected to said first terminal icon and said second function icon is connected to said first variable icon, wherein said first function control means and said second function control means can access said memory storage associated with said first control during execution of said graphical program;
executing said first graphical program in said first virtual instrument after said step of assembling;
said first function control means accessing said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program; and
said second function control means accessing said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of assembling said first graphical program comprises connecting said second function icon to provide an output to said first variable icon, the method further comprising:
said second function control means writing data to said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of assembling said first graphical program comprises connecting said second function icon to receive an output from said first variable icon, the method further comprising:
said second function control means receiving data from said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
4. The method of claim 3, further comprising:
receiving input data changing the value of said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program, wherein said input data is stored in said memory storage associated with said first control; and
said second function control means receiving said input data from said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of assembling said first graphical program comprises connecting said first function icon to provide an output to said first terminal icon, the method further comprising:
said first function control means writing data to said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of assembling said first graphical program comprises connecting said first function icon to receive an output from said first terminal icon, the method further comprising:
said first function control means receiving data from said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program.
7. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
said first function control means writing to said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program in said first virtual instrument; and
said second function control means receiving data from said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program in said first virtual instrument.
8. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
said second function control means writing to said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program in said first virtual instrument; and
said first function control means receiving data from said memory storage associated with said first control during said step of executing said first graphical program in said first virtual instrument.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
displaying on the screen said first control during said steps of executing, wherein said first control displays the value in said memory storage associated with said first control.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of assembling on the screen said first graphical program comprises assembling on the screen a data flow diagram including said first terminal icon, said first function icon, said second function icon and said first variable icon.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein said first variable icon comprises a local variable icon.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein said first variable icon comprises a global variable icon.
13. A method for programming a computer system including a video monitor and means for creating a virtual instrument, the method comprising the computer implemented steps of:
displaying on the screen a first terminal icon that references a first variable in a first virtual instrument;
displaying on the screen a first global variable icon in said first virtual instrument
displaying on the screen a global variable panel including a control having associated memory storage, wherein said first global variable icon references said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control;
displaying on the screen a second terminal icon that references a second variable in a second virtual instrument;
displaying on the screen a copy of said first global variable icon comprised in said second virtual instrument, wherein said copy of said first global variable icon references said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control;
the first virtual instrument executing; and
the second virtual instrument executing concurrently with said first virtual instrument, wherein the memory storage associated with said global variable panel control is accessible by nodes in said first and second virtual instruments through said first global variable icons.
14. The method of claim 13, further comprising:
the first virtual instrument writing a value to said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control; and
the second virtual instrument reading said value in said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control.
15. The method of claim 13, further comprising:
a node in said first virtual instrument writing to said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control using said first global variable icon during said step of executing said first virtual instrument.
16. The method of claim 13, further comprising:
a node in said first virtual instrument reading said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control using said first global variable icon during said step of executing said first virtual instrument.
17. The method of claim 13, further comprising:
displaying on the screen said global variable panel control during said steps of executing, wherein said global variable panel control displays the value in said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control.
18. The method of claim 17, further comprising:
receiving user input changing the value of said global variable panel control, wherein said user input is stored in said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control; and
the first virtual instrument accessing said memory storage associated with said global variable panel control to read said changed value using said first global variable icon comprised in said first virtual instrument during said steps of executing.
US08/125,364 1986-04-14 1993-09-22 Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program Expired - Lifetime US5475851A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US08/125,364 US5475851A (en) 1986-04-14 1993-09-22 Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US06/851,569 US4901221A (en) 1986-04-14 1986-04-14 Graphical system for modelling a process and associated method
US37625789A 1989-07-06 1989-07-06
US07/979,416 US5291587A (en) 1986-04-14 1992-11-19 Graphical system for executing a process and for programming a computer to execute a process, including graphical variable inputs and variable outputs
US08/125,364 US5475851A (en) 1986-04-14 1993-09-22 Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US07/979,416 Continuation-In-Part US5291587A (en) 1986-04-14 1992-11-19 Graphical system for executing a process and for programming a computer to execute a process, including graphical variable inputs and variable outputs

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US5475851A true US5475851A (en) 1995-12-12

Family

ID=46248127

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US08/125,364 Expired - Lifetime US5475851A (en) 1986-04-14 1993-09-22 Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (1) US5475851A (en)

Cited By (83)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5623592A (en) * 1994-10-18 1997-04-22 Molecular Dynamics Method and apparatus for constructing an iconic sequence to operate external devices
US5726883A (en) * 1995-10-10 1998-03-10 Xerox Corporation Method of customizing control interfaces for devices on a network
US5734863A (en) * 1986-04-14 1998-03-31 National Instruments Corporation Method and apparatus for providing improved type compatibility and data structure organization in a graphical data flow diagram
US5764546A (en) * 1996-11-27 1998-06-09 National Instruments Corporation DAQ configuration system and method for configuring channels in a data acquisition device
US5999192A (en) * 1996-04-30 1999-12-07 Lucent Technologies Inc. Interactive data exploration apparatus and methods
US6138123A (en) * 1996-07-25 2000-10-24 Rathbun; Kyle R. Method for creating and using parallel data structures
US6239800B1 (en) * 1997-12-15 2001-05-29 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for leading a user through a software installation procedure via interaction with displayed graphs
US6259448B1 (en) 1998-06-03 2001-07-10 International Business Machines Corporation Resource model configuration and deployment in a distributed computer network
US6286025B1 (en) * 1994-12-09 2001-09-04 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system of process identification by user defined process variables
US6331864B1 (en) 1997-09-23 2001-12-18 Onadime, Inc. Real-time multimedia visual programming system
US6357039B1 (en) * 1998-03-03 2002-03-12 Twelve Tone Systems, Inc Automatic code generation
US6408429B1 (en) 1997-01-17 2002-06-18 Cognex Corporation Machine vision system for identifying and assessing features of an article
US20020075267A1 (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-06-20 Anthony Cake Processing web editor for data processing in a digital oscilloscope or similar instrument
US20020077915A1 (en) * 2000-12-20 2002-06-20 Mitsuyuki Goto Physical distribution business management method, physical distribution business management system, and storage medium
US20020109722A1 (en) * 2000-12-20 2002-08-15 Rogers Steven W. System and method for performing type checking for hardware device nodes in a graphical program
US6473707B1 (en) * 1998-08-21 2002-10-29 National Instruments Corporation Test executive system and method including automatic result collection
US20020165876A1 (en) * 2001-03-02 2002-11-07 Peter Enghauser Method for specifying, executing and analyzing method sequences for recognition
US20020183998A1 (en) * 2001-05-30 2002-12-05 Mojdeh Shakeri Block diagram modeling
US20020196282A1 (en) * 2001-06-20 2002-12-26 Washington Jeffrey D. Collector node for a graphical program
US20030107595A1 (en) * 2001-07-24 2003-06-12 Ciolfi John Edward Handling parameters in block diagram modeling
US20030132965A1 (en) * 2002-01-15 2003-07-17 Santori Michael L. Graphical program system having a single graphical user interface shared by a plurality of graphical programs
WO2004003681A2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-01-08 Motorola, Inc. Method of programming linear graphs for streaming vector computation
US6694505B1 (en) * 1999-11-25 2004-02-17 Kim Seng Holdings Pte. Ltd. Method for using a data flow net to specify and assemble computer software
US20040101413A1 (en) * 2001-03-28 2004-05-27 Ko Inagaki Control device of linear compressor drive system
US20040205111A1 (en) * 2002-11-15 2004-10-14 Zaki Chasmawala User configurable data messages in industrial networks
US20040210685A1 (en) * 2003-04-16 2004-10-21 Orofino Donald Paul Block modeling input/output buffer
US20040255269A1 (en) * 2003-06-12 2004-12-16 Santori Michael L. Automatically configuring a graphical user interface element to bind to a graphical program
US20050114293A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2005-05-26 Microsoft Corporation Property management mechanisms for properties in an on-demand property system
US20050208139A1 (en) * 2004-03-22 2005-09-22 Ascend Therapeutics, Inc. Chemically stable compositions of 4-hydroxy tamoxifen
US20050210445A1 (en) * 1996-05-10 2005-09-22 Apple Computer, Inc. Graphical editor for program files
US20060041859A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2006-02-23 Aljosa Vrancic Synchronizing execution of graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US20060053211A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2006-03-09 Jacob Kornerup Deterministic communication between graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US20060059477A1 (en) * 1999-07-02 2006-03-16 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for dynamically loading data structures into memory with global constant pool
US20060179932A1 (en) * 2003-03-28 2006-08-17 Ramachandran Shekaripuram N Automatic fiber processing system including method and apparatus for producing end-aligned fiber samples
US20060212468A1 (en) * 1999-07-02 2006-09-21 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for global constant management
US20060253840A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2006-11-09 Eologic Limited Program verification and visualization using a dynamic abstracted conceptual model
US20060250530A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2006-11-09 Toshio Sugiyama Signal generator display interface for instinctive operation of editing waveform parameters
US20060277100A1 (en) * 2005-05-06 2006-12-07 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Techniques for awarding random rewards in a reward program
US7313761B1 (en) 2001-03-13 2007-12-25 Cognex Technology And Investment Corporation Tree-style hierarchical control with graphical depiction of non-hierarchical interrelationships
US20080034299A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Hayles Timothy J Configuring Icons to Represent Data Transfer Functionality
US20080034297A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Correll Jeffrey N Graphical Diagram Which Automatically Determines a Data Transport Mechanism For Wires Based On Configured Policies
US20080034079A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Kodosky Jeffrey L Diagram with Configurable Wires
US20080034298A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Kodosky Jeffrey L Graphical Diagram Wires whose Appearance Represents Configured Semantics
US20080051194A1 (en) * 2001-07-25 2008-02-28 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random pay gaming method and system
US20080195655A1 (en) * 2005-04-26 2008-08-14 Fumihito Kondou Video Object Representation Data Structure, Program For Generating Video Object Representation Data Structure, Method Of Generating Video Object Representation Data Structure, Video Software Development Device, Image Processing Program
US20080307332A1 (en) * 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Hayles Timothy J Data Transfer Indicator Icon a Diagram
US20090019453A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2009-01-15 Anand Kodaganur Automatically Arranging Objects in a Graphical Program Block Diagram
US20090113322A1 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-04-30 Rogers Steven W Global Variable Structure in a Graphical Program
US20090113337A1 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-04-30 Rogers Steven W Global Variable Structure in a Graphical Program
US20090197674A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2009-08-06 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Techniques for generating a random awards using a plurality of average values
US20090320006A1 (en) * 2006-02-16 2009-12-24 Franaszek Peter A Learning and cache management in software defined contexts
US7668608B2 (en) 2006-09-01 2010-02-23 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Graphical programming language object editing and reporting tool
US20100153910A1 (en) * 2008-12-11 2010-06-17 The Mathworks, Inc. Subgraph execution control in a graphical modeling environment
US20110016383A1 (en) * 2009-07-20 2011-01-20 Hon Hai Precision Industry Co., Ltd. Embedded electronic device and method of implementing user interface therein
US20110022975A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-01-27 Anand Kodaganur Automatically Arranging Objects in a Selected Portion of a Graphical Program Block Diagram
US20110029905A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-02-03 Anand Kodaganur Re-Arranging a Graphical Program while Keeping Contents of a Structure Object Fixed
US20110035723A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-02-10 Anand Kodaganur Excluding a Portion of a Graphical Program from Re-Arrangement
US20130060603A1 (en) * 2011-07-25 2013-03-07 Richard Chadwick Wagner Business Performance Forecasting System and Method
US20130290942A1 (en) * 2012-04-25 2013-10-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method, computer, and computer program for speculatively optimizing code
US8612637B2 (en) 2011-09-25 2013-12-17 National Instruments Corportion Configuring buffers with timing information
US9195439B2 (en) 2008-12-11 2015-11-24 The Mathworks, Inc. Multi-threaded subgraph execution control in a graphical modeling environment
US9235395B2 (en) 2013-05-30 2016-01-12 National Instruments Corporation Graphical development and deployment of parallel floating-point math functionality on a system with heterogeneous hardware components
US9442701B1 (en) * 2007-06-21 2016-09-13 The Mathworks, Inc. Verifying models for exceptional behavior
US9652213B2 (en) 2014-10-23 2017-05-16 National Instruments Corporation Global optimization and verification of cyber-physical systems using floating point math functionality on a system with heterogeneous hardware components
US10031490B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-07-24 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Mobile analysis of physical phenomena in a process plant
US10037303B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-07-31 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Collecting and delivering data to a big data machine in a process control system
US10168691B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2019-01-01 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data pipeline for process control system analytics
US10282676B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2019-05-07 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Automatic signal processing-based learning in a process plant
US10296668B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-05-21 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data modeling studio
US10386827B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2019-08-20 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics platform
US10503483B2 (en) 2016-02-12 2019-12-10 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Rule builder in a process control network
US10521197B1 (en) * 2016-12-02 2019-12-31 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US10649449B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics
US10649424B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics
US10656627B2 (en) 2014-01-31 2020-05-19 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Managing big data in process control systems
US10678225B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-06-09 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data analytic services for distributed industrial performance monitoring
US10740772B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2020-08-11 Prevedere, Inc. Systems and methods for forecasting based upon time series data
US10866952B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-12-15 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Source-independent queries in distributed industrial system
US10896388B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2021-01-19 Prevedere, Inc. Systems and methods for business analytics management and modeling
US10909137B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2021-02-02 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Streaming data for analytics in process control systems
US11175180B2 (en) 2017-06-14 2021-11-16 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy High energy power measurement systems and methods
US11385608B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2022-07-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Big data in process control systems
US11829689B1 (en) 2020-06-09 2023-11-28 The Mathworks, Inc. Systems and methods for creating variant regions in acausal simulation models

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4849880A (en) * 1985-11-18 1989-07-18 John Fluke Mfg. Co., Inc. Virtual machine programming system
US5168441A (en) * 1990-05-30 1992-12-01 Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. Methods for set up and programming of machine and process controllers

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4849880A (en) * 1985-11-18 1989-07-18 John Fluke Mfg. Co., Inc. Virtual machine programming system
US5168441A (en) * 1990-05-30 1992-12-01 Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. Methods for set up and programming of machine and process controllers

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Dan Strassberg, "Data-acquisition packages get applications running quickly," EDN, Jun. 10, 1993 V38, n12 p. 93(2).
Dan Strassberg, Data acquisition packages get applications running quickly, EDN, Jun. 10, 1993 V38, n12 p. 93(2). *
Schildt, C: The Complete Reference McGraw Hill 1987 pp. 22 29. *
Schildt, C: The Complete Reference McGraw Hill 1987 pp. 22-29.

Cited By (167)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5734863A (en) * 1986-04-14 1998-03-31 National Instruments Corporation Method and apparatus for providing improved type compatibility and data structure organization in a graphical data flow diagram
US5623592A (en) * 1994-10-18 1997-04-22 Molecular Dynamics Method and apparatus for constructing an iconic sequence to operate external devices
US6286025B1 (en) * 1994-12-09 2001-09-04 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system of process identification by user defined process variables
US5726883A (en) * 1995-10-10 1998-03-10 Xerox Corporation Method of customizing control interfaces for devices on a network
US5999192A (en) * 1996-04-30 1999-12-07 Lucent Technologies Inc. Interactive data exploration apparatus and methods
US20110107321A1 (en) * 1996-05-10 2011-05-05 Apple Inc. Editor for program files
US7987427B1 (en) * 1996-05-10 2011-07-26 Apple Inc. Graphical editor for program files
US7840956B2 (en) 1996-05-10 2010-11-23 Apple Inc. Editor for program files
US8214822B2 (en) 1996-05-10 2012-07-03 Apple Inc. Editor for program files
US20050210445A1 (en) * 1996-05-10 2005-09-22 Apple Computer, Inc. Graphical editor for program files
US6138123A (en) * 1996-07-25 2000-10-24 Rathbun; Kyle R. Method for creating and using parallel data structures
US5764546A (en) * 1996-11-27 1998-06-09 National Instruments Corporation DAQ configuration system and method for configuring channels in a data acquisition device
US6408429B1 (en) 1997-01-17 2002-06-18 Cognex Corporation Machine vision system for identifying and assessing features of an article
US6331864B1 (en) 1997-09-23 2001-12-18 Onadime, Inc. Real-time multimedia visual programming system
US6944825B2 (en) 1997-09-23 2005-09-13 Onadime, Inc. Real-time multimedia visual programming system
US20060010384A1 (en) * 1997-09-23 2006-01-12 Onadime, Inc. Real-time multimedia visual programming system
US6239800B1 (en) * 1997-12-15 2001-05-29 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for leading a user through a software installation procedure via interaction with displayed graphs
US6357039B1 (en) * 1998-03-03 2002-03-12 Twelve Tone Systems, Inc Automatic code generation
US6259448B1 (en) 1998-06-03 2001-07-10 International Business Machines Corporation Resource model configuration and deployment in a distributed computer network
US6473707B1 (en) * 1998-08-21 2002-10-29 National Instruments Corporation Test executive system and method including automatic result collection
US7765524B2 (en) 1999-07-02 2010-07-27 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for global constant management
US20060059477A1 (en) * 1999-07-02 2006-03-16 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for dynamically loading data structures into memory with global constant pool
US7774770B2 (en) * 1999-07-02 2010-08-10 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for dynamically loading data structures into memory with global constant pool
US20060212468A1 (en) * 1999-07-02 2006-09-21 Philippe Harscoet Method and system for global constant management
US6694505B1 (en) * 1999-11-25 2004-02-17 Kim Seng Holdings Pte. Ltd. Method for using a data flow net to specify and assemble computer software
US7811168B2 (en) * 2000-07-25 2010-10-12 Gaming Enhancement, Inc. Random pay gaming system using weighting function with maximum, minimum, and average value
US7871328B2 (en) 2000-07-25 2011-01-18 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random pay using non-gaming revenue
US7887415B2 (en) 2000-07-25 2011-02-15 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random payout while maintaining the progressive prize pool at the predetermined average pool size
US20080102942A1 (en) * 2000-07-25 2008-05-01 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random pay gaming method and system
US20080076543A1 (en) * 2000-07-25 2008-03-27 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random pay gaming method and system
EP1397864A2 (en) * 2000-11-17 2004-03-17 Lecroy Corporation Processing web for data processing in a digital oscilloscope or similar instrument
EP1397864A4 (en) * 2000-11-17 2006-03-01 Lecroy Corp Processing web for data processing in a digital oscilloscope or similar instrument
US6885953B2 (en) * 2000-11-17 2005-04-26 Lecroy Corporation Oscilloscope panel capture and implementation
US20020097243A1 (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-07-25 Miller Martin Thomas Processing web for data processing in a digital oscilloscope or similar instrument
US20020075267A1 (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-06-20 Anthony Cake Processing web editor for data processing in a digital oscilloscope or similar instrument
US20020077915A1 (en) * 2000-12-20 2002-06-20 Mitsuyuki Goto Physical distribution business management method, physical distribution business management system, and storage medium
US20020109722A1 (en) * 2000-12-20 2002-08-15 Rogers Steven W. System and method for performing type checking for hardware device nodes in a graphical program
US7487119B2 (en) * 2000-12-20 2009-02-03 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Physical distribution business management method, physical distribution business management system, and storage medium
US7913170B2 (en) * 2000-12-20 2011-03-22 National Instruments Corporation System and method for performing type checking for hardware device nodes in a graphical program
CN100347699C (en) * 2000-12-20 2007-11-07 株式会社理光 Material flow business management method, material flow management system and recording medium
US7120616B2 (en) * 2001-03-02 2006-10-10 Siemens Ag Method for specifying, executing and analyzing method sequences for recognition
US20020165876A1 (en) * 2001-03-02 2002-11-07 Peter Enghauser Method for specifying, executing and analyzing method sequences for recognition
US7313761B1 (en) 2001-03-13 2007-12-25 Cognex Technology And Investment Corporation Tree-style hierarchical control with graphical depiction of non-hierarchical interrelationships
US20040101413A1 (en) * 2001-03-28 2004-05-27 Ko Inagaki Control device of linear compressor drive system
US20090037158A1 (en) * 2001-05-30 2009-02-05 The Mathworks, Inc. Block diagram modeling
US20020183998A1 (en) * 2001-05-30 2002-12-05 Mojdeh Shakeri Block diagram modeling
US7433812B2 (en) * 2001-05-30 2008-10-07 The Mathworks, Inc. Block diagram modeling
US7996194B2 (en) 2001-05-30 2011-08-09 The Mathworks, Inc. Block diagram modeling
US20020196282A1 (en) * 2001-06-20 2002-12-26 Washington Jeffrey D. Collector node for a graphical program
US20090228864A1 (en) * 2001-06-20 2009-09-10 Washington Jeffrey D Collector Node for a Graphical Program
US8185835B2 (en) 2001-06-20 2012-05-22 National Instruments Corporation Collector node for a graphical program
US20030107595A1 (en) * 2001-07-24 2003-06-12 Ciolfi John Edward Handling parameters in block diagram modeling
US8793601B1 (en) 2001-07-24 2014-07-29 The Mathworks, Inc. Handling parameters in block diagram modeling
US8615715B1 (en) * 2001-07-24 2013-12-24 The Mathworks, Inc. Handling parameters in block diagram modeling
US8196056B2 (en) * 2001-07-24 2012-06-05 The Mathworks, Inc. Handling parameters in block diagram modeling
US20080051194A1 (en) * 2001-07-25 2008-02-28 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Random pay gaming method and system
US7043696B2 (en) * 2002-01-15 2006-05-09 National Instruments Corporation Graphical program system having a single graphical user interface shared by a plurality of graphical programs
US20030132965A1 (en) * 2002-01-15 2003-07-17 Santori Michael L. Graphical program system having a single graphical user interface shared by a plurality of graphical programs
WO2004003681A2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-01-08 Motorola, Inc. Method of programming linear graphs for streaming vector computation
US7562095B2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2009-07-14 Microsoft Corporation Application programming interfaces for an on-demand property system
US7464107B2 (en) * 2002-06-28 2008-12-09 Microsoft Corporation Property management mechanisms for properties in an on-demand property system
WO2004003681A3 (en) * 2002-06-28 2004-04-15 Motorola Inc Method of programming linear graphs for streaming vector computation
US20050165830A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2005-07-28 Microsoft Corporation Application programming interfaces for an on-demand property system
US20050114293A1 (en) * 2002-06-28 2005-05-26 Microsoft Corporation Property management mechanisms for properties in an on-demand property system
US20040205111A1 (en) * 2002-11-15 2004-10-14 Zaki Chasmawala User configurable data messages in industrial networks
US20060179932A1 (en) * 2003-03-28 2006-08-17 Ramachandran Shekaripuram N Automatic fiber processing system including method and apparatus for producing end-aligned fiber samples
US20040210685A1 (en) * 2003-04-16 2004-10-21 Orofino Donald Paul Block modeling input/output buffer
US7478016B2 (en) * 2003-04-16 2009-01-13 The Mathworks, Inc. Block modeling input/output buffer
US20080052425A1 (en) * 2003-04-16 2008-02-28 The Mathworks, Inc. Block modeling input/output buffer
US7613852B2 (en) 2003-04-16 2009-11-03 The Mathworks, Inc. Block modeling input/output buffer having first and second block of block diagram for passing a plurality of data between said first and second blocks
US7624375B2 (en) 2003-06-12 2009-11-24 National Instruments Corporation Automatically configuring a graphical user interface element to bind to a graphical program
US20040255269A1 (en) * 2003-06-12 2004-12-16 Santori Michael L. Automatically configuring a graphical user interface element to bind to a graphical program
US20050208139A1 (en) * 2004-03-22 2005-09-22 Ascend Therapeutics, Inc. Chemically stable compositions of 4-hydroxy tamoxifen
US7565609B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2009-07-21 National Instruments Corporation Synchronizing execution of graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US20090319815A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2009-12-24 Aljosa Vrancic Synchronizing Graphical Programs Executing on Respective Computer Systems
US20060041859A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2006-02-23 Aljosa Vrancic Synchronizing execution of graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US20060053211A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2006-03-09 Jacob Kornerup Deterministic communication between graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US8204951B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2012-06-19 National Instruments Corporation Deterministic communication between graphical programs executing on different computer systems using variable nodes
US20110138008A1 (en) * 2004-07-16 2011-06-09 Jacob Kornerup Deterministic Communication Between Graphical Programs Executing on Different Computer Systems Using Variable Nodes
US7831680B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2010-11-09 National Instruments Corporation Deterministic communication between graphical programs executing on different computer systems
US7975228B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2011-07-05 National Instruments Corporation Synchronizing graphical programs executing on respective computer systems
US20090197674A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2009-08-06 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Techniques for generating a random awards using a plurality of average values
US8814659B2 (en) 2004-12-15 2014-08-26 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Techniques for generating a random awards using a plurality of average values
US20060250530A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2006-11-09 Toshio Sugiyama Signal generator display interface for instinctive operation of editing waveform parameters
US7928981B2 (en) * 2005-04-22 2011-04-19 Tektronix International Sales Gmbh Signal generator display interface for instinctive operation of editing waveform parameters
US20060253840A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2006-11-09 Eologic Limited Program verification and visualization using a dynamic abstracted conceptual model
US20080195655A1 (en) * 2005-04-26 2008-08-14 Fumihito Kondou Video Object Representation Data Structure, Program For Generating Video Object Representation Data Structure, Method Of Generating Video Object Representation Data Structure, Video Software Development Device, Image Processing Program
US20060277100A1 (en) * 2005-05-06 2006-12-07 Gaming Enhancements, Inc. Techniques for awarding random rewards in a reward program
US8136106B2 (en) * 2006-02-16 2012-03-13 International Business Machines Corporation Learning and cache management in software defined contexts
US20090320006A1 (en) * 2006-02-16 2009-12-24 Franaszek Peter A Learning and cache management in software defined contexts
US20080034297A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Correll Jeffrey N Graphical Diagram Which Automatically Determines a Data Transport Mechanism For Wires Based On Configured Policies
US9310975B2 (en) 2006-08-04 2016-04-12 National Instruments Corporation Automatically determining data transfer functionality for wires in a graphical diagram
US20080034299A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Hayles Timothy J Configuring Icons to Represent Data Transfer Functionality
US20080034079A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Kodosky Jeffrey L Diagram with Configurable Wires
US8028242B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2011-09-27 National Instruments Corporation Diagram with configurable wires
US8028241B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2011-09-27 National Instruments Corporation Graphical diagram wires whose appearance represents configured semantics
US8108784B2 (en) * 2006-08-04 2012-01-31 National Instruments Corporation Configuring icons to represent data transfer functionality
US20080034298A1 (en) * 2006-08-04 2008-02-07 Kodosky Jeffrey L Graphical Diagram Wires whose Appearance Represents Configured Semantics
US8612871B2 (en) 2006-08-04 2013-12-17 National Instruments Corporation Graphical diagram which automatically determines a data transport mechanism for wires based on configured policies
US7668608B2 (en) 2006-09-01 2010-02-23 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Graphical programming language object editing and reporting tool
US20080307332A1 (en) * 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Hayles Timothy J Data Transfer Indicator Icon a Diagram
US7996782B2 (en) 2007-06-08 2011-08-09 National Instruments Corporation Data transfer indicator icon in a diagram
US9442701B1 (en) * 2007-06-21 2016-09-13 The Mathworks, Inc. Verifying models for exceptional behavior
US8533739B2 (en) 2007-07-09 2013-09-10 National Instruments Corporation Re-arranging a graphical program while keeping contents of a structure object fixed
US20110029905A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-02-03 Anand Kodaganur Re-Arranging a Graphical Program while Keeping Contents of a Structure Object Fixed
US20090019453A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2009-01-15 Anand Kodaganur Automatically Arranging Objects in a Graphical Program Block Diagram
US20110022975A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-01-27 Anand Kodaganur Automatically Arranging Objects in a Selected Portion of a Graphical Program Block Diagram
US20110035723A1 (en) * 2007-07-09 2011-02-10 Anand Kodaganur Excluding a Portion of a Graphical Program from Re-Arrangement
US8539505B2 (en) 2007-07-09 2013-09-17 National Instruments Corporation Automatically arranging objects in a selected portion of a graphical program block diagram
US8479218B2 (en) 2007-07-09 2013-07-02 National Instruments Corporation Automatically arranging objects in a graphical program block diagram
US8533738B2 (en) 2007-07-09 2013-09-10 National Instruments Corporation Excluding a portion of a graphical program from re-arrangement
US20090113337A1 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-04-30 Rogers Steven W Global Variable Structure in a Graphical Program
US8392878B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2013-03-05 National Instruments Corporation In-place structure in a graphical program
US8381174B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2013-02-19 National Instruments Corporation Global variable structure in a graphical program
US20090113322A1 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-04-30 Rogers Steven W Global Variable Structure in a Graphical Program
US20100153910A1 (en) * 2008-12-11 2010-06-17 The Mathworks, Inc. Subgraph execution control in a graphical modeling environment
US8756562B2 (en) * 2008-12-11 2014-06-17 The Mathworks, Inc. Subgraph execution control in a graphical modeling environment
US9195439B2 (en) 2008-12-11 2015-11-24 The Mathworks, Inc. Multi-threaded subgraph execution control in a graphical modeling environment
US20110016383A1 (en) * 2009-07-20 2011-01-20 Hon Hai Precision Industry Co., Ltd. Embedded electronic device and method of implementing user interface therein
US8464215B2 (en) * 2009-07-20 2013-06-11 Hon Hai Precision Industry Co., Ltd. Embedded electronic device and method of implementing user interface therein
US10740772B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2020-08-11 Prevedere, Inc. Systems and methods for forecasting based upon time series data
US10497064B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2019-12-03 Prevedere Inc. Analyzing econometric data via interactive chart through the alignment of inflection points
US10176533B2 (en) * 2011-07-25 2019-01-08 Prevedere Inc. Interactive chart utilizing shifting control to render shifting of time domains of data series
US20130060603A1 (en) * 2011-07-25 2013-03-07 Richard Chadwick Wagner Business Performance Forecasting System and Method
US10896388B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2021-01-19 Prevedere, Inc. Systems and methods for business analytics management and modeling
US8612637B2 (en) 2011-09-25 2013-12-17 National Instruments Corportion Configuring buffers with timing information
US9027008B2 (en) * 2012-04-25 2015-05-05 International Business Machines Corporation Method, computer, and computer program for speculatively optimizing code
US20130290942A1 (en) * 2012-04-25 2013-10-31 International Business Machines Corporation Method, computer, and computer program for speculatively optimizing code
US10866952B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-12-15 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Source-independent queries in distributed industrial system
US10678225B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-06-09 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data analytic services for distributed industrial performance monitoring
US10649424B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics
US10649449B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics
US11385608B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2022-07-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Big data in process control systems
US10386827B2 (en) 2013-03-04 2019-08-20 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics platform
US10037303B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-07-31 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Collecting and delivering data to a big data machine in a process control system
US10223327B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-03-05 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Collecting and delivering data to a big data machine in a process control system
US10311015B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-06-04 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed big data in a process control system
US10296668B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-05-21 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data modeling studio
US10031490B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-07-24 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Mobile analysis of physical phenomena in a process plant
US11573672B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-02-07 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method for initiating or resuming a mobile control session in a process plant
US11169651B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-11-09 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling a process plant with location aware mobile devices
US11112925B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-09-07 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Supervisor engine for process control
US10324423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-06-18 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling a process plant with location aware mobile control devices
US10551799B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-02-04 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining the position of a mobile control device in a process plant
US10691281B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-06-23 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for controlling a process plant with location aware mobile control devices
US10649413B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method for initiating or resuming a mobile control session in a process plant
US10152031B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-12-11 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Generating checklists in a process control environment
US10649412B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-05-12 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for seamless state transfer between user interface devices in a mobile control room
US10133243B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-11-20 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for seamless state transfer between user interface devices in a mobile control room
US10671028B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-06-02 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for managing a work flow in a process plant
US9904523B2 (en) 2013-05-30 2018-02-27 National Instruments Corporation Graphical development and deployment of parallel floating-point math functionality on a system with heterogeneous hardware components
US9235395B2 (en) 2013-05-30 2016-01-12 National Instruments Corporation Graphical development and deployment of parallel floating-point math functionality on a system with heterogeneous hardware components
US10656627B2 (en) 2014-01-31 2020-05-19 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Managing big data in process control systems
US10168691B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2019-01-01 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Data pipeline for process control system analytics
US10909137B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2021-02-02 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Streaming data for analytics in process control systems
US10282676B2 (en) 2014-10-06 2019-05-07 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Automatic signal processing-based learning in a process plant
US9652213B2 (en) 2014-10-23 2017-05-16 National Instruments Corporation Global optimization and verification of cyber-physical systems using floating point math functionality on a system with heterogeneous hardware components
US11886155B2 (en) 2015-10-09 2024-01-30 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Distributed industrial performance monitoring and analytics
US10503483B2 (en) 2016-02-12 2019-12-10 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. Rule builder in a process control network
US10866789B1 (en) 2016-12-02 2020-12-15 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US11360747B1 (en) 2016-12-02 2022-06-14 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US11126407B1 (en) 2016-12-02 2021-09-21 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US11409504B1 (en) 2016-12-02 2022-08-09 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US10521197B1 (en) * 2016-12-02 2019-12-31 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US10545731B1 (en) 2016-12-02 2020-01-28 The Mathworks, Inc. Variant modeling elements in graphical programs
US11175180B2 (en) 2017-06-14 2021-11-16 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy High energy power measurement systems and methods
US11829689B1 (en) 2020-06-09 2023-11-28 The Mathworks, Inc. Systems and methods for creating variant regions in acausal simulation models

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US5475851A (en) Method and apparatus for improved local and global variable capabilities in a graphical data flow program
US5481740A (en) Method and apparatus for providing autoprobe features in a graphical data flow diagram
US5737622A (en) Method and apparatus for more efficient function synchronization in a data flow program
US5497500A (en) Method and apparatus for more efficient function synchronization in a data flow program
US5734863A (en) Method and apparatus for providing improved type compatibility and data structure organization in a graphical data flow diagram
US5504917A (en) Method and apparatus for providing picture generation and control features in a graphical data flow environment
US5821934A (en) Method and apparatus for providing stricter data type capabilities in a graphical data flow diagram
US5481741A (en) Method and apparatus for providing attribute nodes in a graphical data flow environment
US5610828A (en) Graphical system for modelling a process and associated method
US5732277A (en) Graphical system for modelling a process and associated method
US5291587A (en) Graphical system for executing a process and for programming a computer to execute a process, including graphical variable inputs and variable outputs
CA1285655C (en) Graphical system for modelling a process and associated method
Myers et al. GARNET comprehensive support for graphical, highly interactive user interfaces
US6880130B2 (en) Specifying timing and triggering functionality in a graphical program using graphical program nodes
US7216334B2 (en) Self-determining behavior node for use in creating a graphical program
US6690981B1 (en) System and method for encapsulating user interface code for a graphical program
US7134086B2 (en) System and method for associating a block diagram with a user interface element
US7366993B2 (en) Automatic graph display
US7043693B2 (en) System and method for programmatically generating a second graphical program based on a first graphical program
US8028241B2 (en) Graphical diagram wires whose appearance represents configured semantics
US20130031494A1 (en) Type Generic Graphical Programming
JPH0642210B2 (en) Electronic device control method
US7120877B2 (en) System and method for creating a graphical program including a plurality of portions to be executed sequentially
US6874148B1 (en) System and method for exporting a graphical program to a shared library
US6070006A (en) Object oriented software development tool for creation of new class(es)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS, INC., TEXAS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:KODOSKY, JEFFREY L.;ROGERS, STEVEN W.;REEL/FRAME:006972/0386

Effective date: 19931116

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

REMI Maintenance fee reminder mailed
FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

SULP Surcharge for late payment
FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 8

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 12